Data JohnsonControl
Data JohnsonControl
Data JohnsonControl
2004
Where people live, work and relax there's a need for comfort.
Ever-increasing demands are being placed on the environments in which we live, work and relax. We expect the optimum level of heating, air-conditioning and ventilation, whether we're shopping, sleeping or socialising. We enjoy a wide variety of perishable goods than ever before, thanks to advances in refrigeration. You need to be confident that you can provide the most comfortable and safest environment for building occupants, while managing energy usage to achieve the best performance at the lowest cost. You need to know that the equipment used is well maintained and meets the standards set out in the relevant legislation. This is where the strength of Johnson Controls comes in. As specialists in the design, development, installation and maintenance of Building Management Systems for all types of environments, we understand your needs. We offer the latest technologies for your current requirements, and the flexibility to take on board changes in the future. Our broad range of technological expertise and commitment to excellence is your guarantee of quality in both product and service.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
Control Products
Index
Temperature Sensors and Tranmitters
A99 Temperature Sensors TS-9100/TE-9100 Electronic Sensors and Transducers TS-9100 Electronic Sensors and Transducers (continued) RS-9100 Electronic Room Temperature Sensors and Transducers HX-9100 Dew point Sensor Accessories
Section A
7 8 9 10 11 11
Section B
12 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 20 20
F61 Flow Switches for Liquid F62 Air Flow Switches F63 Liquid Level Float Switches Accessories for Flow and Level Float Switches
Section C
21 22 22 23 24 25 26 27
PT-5215-7300 Low Differential Air Pressure Transmitter PT-5217 Liquid or Air Pressure Transmitter P299 Pressure Transducer PS-9101 Differential pressure transmitter P32 Sensitive Differential Pressure Control for Air Proving P233 Sensitive Differential Pressure Control P20 for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heat pump Applications P28 Oil Protection Controls P45 Oil Protection Controls P74 Differential Pressure Control P48 Steam Pressure Controls P735 Single Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications P736 Dual Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications P77 Single Pressure Controls for IP54 Applications P78 Dual Pressure Controls for IP54 Applications P100 Direct Mount Pressure Switches Accessories for Pressure Switches Accessories for Pressure Switches H735 Synthetic Flexible Hose
Section D
Pressure Controls
Section E
28 29 30 34 35 36 37 38 40 42 44 46 49 50 50 51
Series HT-9000 Electronic Humidity Transmitter W43 Humidity Controls 52 Detectors and Monitoring Units for detection and alarm signaling of refrigerant leakage.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
V46 Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves, Angled V46 Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves V46 Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves, Flanged V46 Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves, Maritime V46 Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves, Flanged Maritime V46SA Two-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves, Low Flow V47 Two-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves, Angled V47 Two-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves V47 Two-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves, Flanged V47 Two-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves, Maritime V47 Two-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves, Flanged Maritime V48 Three-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves V48 Three-way Pressure Actuated Water Valves V49 Three-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves V49 Three-way Temperature Actuated Water Valves Accessories VG4000 Series High Capacity / High Close-off Zone Valves VG5000 Forged Brass 2-Way and Mixing Valves for Hot and Cold Water for HVAC Systems VG7000 Series Female Threaded Bronze 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water or low pressure steam, luid temp. limits: 2 140 C with brass trim, 2 170 C with stainless steel trim. VG8000H Flanged 2 and 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN25 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50% ) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C** (-20 C when optional glycerine cup is used. 280 C when cooling fin is used) VG8000N Flanged 2 and 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN16 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50% ) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 180 C** (-10 C when optional glycerine cup is used) VG8000V Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50% ) DN 15 - DN 150 Nodular Iron PN 16. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C * VG8300N & H Series Flanged 2-Way PDTC for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50% ) DN 40 - DN 150 Balanced Pressure Nodular Iron PN 16 & PN 25. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C * VG9000 Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 30% ), DN 20 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 & PN 10. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C VGS800W1N Series PN 16, Rp to Rp 2, Male Threaded Bronze Valves VBB Series Pressure Balanced Flanged 2-way Valves DN 50 DN 150 Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C* Nodular Iron PN 16 & 25, For water, glycol solutions (max 50% ) or steam. VBD Series Flanged 2and 3-way Valves DN 15 DN 150 Nodular Iron PN 25, Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C (-20 C when glycerine cup is used)*. For water, glycol solutions (max 50% ) or steam. VBF Series Flanged 2and 3-way Valves DN 15 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 and PN 10, Fluid temp. limits +2 to 130 C For water, glycol solutions (max 50% ).
Section I
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 68
Control Valves
Section J
71 72 76 78 81 84 86 88 90 91 92 93 95 96 97 98 100 101 102 103 104 106 107 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125
VA-7010 On/Off Zone Valve Actuator VA-7040 Thermal Zone Valve Actuator VA-7150 Control Valve Actuator VA-7200 Control Valve Actuator VA-7310 Control Valve Actuator VA-7450 Zone Valve Actuator VA-7700 Control Valve Actuator FA-1000 Control Valve Spring Return Actuator FA-2000 Control Valve Spring Return Actuator FA-3000 Control Valve Heavy Duty Actuator RA-3000 Control Valve Actuator RA-3000-7410 Control Valve Actuator RA-3100-8026 Fast Running Control Valve Actuator MP8000 Pneumatic Actuator
Section K
Damper Actuators
Silence 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Silence 2-point Electric Actuator Silence Modulating Electric Actuator Standard 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Standard 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Spring-return 2-point Electric Actuator Spring-return 3-point Electric Actuator Spring-return 2-point Electric Actuator Spring-return Modulating Electric Actuator
Section L
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
Security Fire Spring-return 2-point Actuators for Safety Dampers Security Fire Spring-return 2-point Actuators for Safety Dampers (cont.) Security Fire Spring-return 2-point Actuators for Safety Dampers (cont.) Security Smoke 2-point Safety Actuators for Smoke Dampers Security fire SLC Safety System for Safety Dampers Security fire SLC Safety System for Safety Dampers (cont.) Security Smoke SLC Safety System for Safety Dampers Valve 2 and 3-point Electric Mixing Actuator Valve Modulating Electric Mixing Actuator Valve Modulating Electric Mixing Actuator Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator (continued) Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator (continued) Special Spring-return 2-point Electric Damper Actuator Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator (continued) Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Special 2- and 3 Point Electric Damper Actuator Special 2- and 3 Point Electric Damper Actuator Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator PA-PF Transmitters 147 Damper Linkage 147 IP 65 Housing 148 Temperature Sensor 148 Series SC-9100 Easy DDC Controller Series SC-9180 Room Command Module for SC-9100 Series TC-9102 Fan Coil Unit Controller Series TC-9102 Fan Coil Unit Controller (continued) Series TM-9100 Room Command Module Series TC-8900 Stand Alone Unit Controllers Series TC-8900 Stand Alone Unit Controllers (continued)
Section L
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146
Section M
Electronic Controls
FX05 Compact programmable controller for Refrigeration and HVAC applications FX10 Standard Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications. FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications. FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications. FX15 Universal High Performance Controller for Chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc FX15 Classic High Performance Controller for Chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc LUI Large User Interface MUI Medium User Interface SUI Small User Interface
Section N
157 158 160 161 162 165 168 169 170
MR10 Series Thermostats for Compressor and Defrost Management Parameters : MR40 Series Advanced Thermostats for Compressor and Defrost Management Display parameters MS Series Elecronic Refrigeration Control Parameters CR Series Positive Temperature Cold Room Control Cabinets CR Series Negative Temperature Cold Room Control Cabinets CR Series Cold Room Cabinets with three fase defrost CR Series Negative Temperature Cold Room Cabinets with Three Phase Defrost and Evapoator Fan Control CR Series Temperature Cold Room Cabinets Parameters Parameters : System 27 NOVA, One- and Two-stage Thermostat, without Sensor System 27 NOVA, Panel mount Display Modules System 27, Display/Selector Modules System 27 NOVA, One- and Two-stage Humidistat, without Sensor System 27 NOVA, Display Modules, without Sensors System 27 NOVA Stage Modules, Incl. quick connector System 27 NOVA Signal Converter
Section O
171 174 175 177 179 182 183 184 185 186 187 187 188 189 189 190 191 191 192 193
Section P
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
P215 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers P215 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers P15CS Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers U215LR 0-10 Vdc/4-20 mA Input Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers A255 Temperature Actuated Fan Speed Controllers for 3-phase Motors P255 Single/Dual Input Pressure Actuated Fan Speed Controllers for 3-phase Motors U255 (0 - 10 V Input) Fan Speed Controllers for 3-phase Motors P35 Pressure Transducers Accessories for Pressure Transducers
Section Q
194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 211 212 213 214
DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller (continued) XTM-905/XT-9100 Extension Module, XPx/XP910x Expansion Modules TCU Fan Coil Unit Controller VMA Variable Air Volume Controller
Section R
Accessories
EP-2000 Series Electro-Pneumatic Transducers EP-8000 Series Electro-Pneumatic Transducers SR-9100 Staging Relay 010 V input, 2 relay outputs
Section S
Gas Controls
GS-3001 Solenoid Gas Valve (Normally Open) PV-1000 Ingition Solenoid Gas Valve Rp 1/8 to Rp 1/2 GS-20/25 and GS-40/45 Single stage Solenoid Gas Valves GS-21.. and GS-41.. Two-stage Solenoid Gas Valves GS-20 and GS-40 Multi option, Single stage Solenoid Gas Valves GS-5000 Single stage Solenoid Gas Valves GM-20/25 and GM-40/45 Single stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves GM-21/26 and GM-41/46 Two stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves GM-20/25/21 and GM-40/45/41 Single stage and Two stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves GH-5000 Electro-hydraulic Gas Safety Shut-Off Valves (screwed and flanged) Accessories for Gas Controls GM-/GS- Replacement Parts for Gas Controls GM/GS-2/4 GO-10.. Gas Pressure Switches GO-11.. Gas Pressure Switches
Section T
215 216 217 218 219 221 222 223 224 227 230 231 232 233
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
94 65 ,5 52
94 6 5,5 52
P G13 ,5
PG 13 ,5
PG1 3 ,5
18
Dichtung
50
13
52/143
Dimensions Bulb
Bulbwell
Rod Sensor
31
94 65 ,5 52
47
PG13 ,5
42
PG13, 5
81
20 - 90
Room Sensor Selection Table Sensor Type Cable length (m) 2 shielded 2 PVC 0.25 PVC 5 PVC 6 PVC 3 silicon Duct 200 mm Outdoor Rod 160mm Rod 200 mm Rod 300 mm Rod 500 mm Room Strap-on Well, 52mm Well, 143mm Well, 143mm
Outdoor Sensor
42
12
Strap-on Sensor
10
42
Description The A99 Temperature sensor line offers an economical solution for a wide variety of temperature sensing needs, in the cooling, heating, ventilation and air conditioning application field. The A99 temperature sensor line includes various models, such as: bulb sensors bulb well sensors room sensors outdoor sensors duct sensors rod sensors strap-on sensors The A99 series is based on a PTC- thermistorsensing element. Each sensor is calibrated which results in a high accuracy over a wide temperature range. Features Wide range of enclosures for sensing elements PG 13,5 cable inlet for all models with polycarbonate housing Very accurate sensing element 3 types of sensor cable High resistance variation per C Several sensor accessories are available Stainless steel sensor bulb
38 47
42
42
81
38 47
38 47
86 /177
200 mm
42
38 47
38 47
Sensor material
Diam. x length
Additional features
Temp range : -40 to +100C (standard + shielded cable models) : -50 to +120C (Silicon cable models)
Bulb
3 PVC
6 x 50
A99BB-300C A99BB-500C A99BB-600C A99BC-300C A99DY-200C A99EY-1C A99LY-160C A99LY-200C A99LY-300C A99LY-500C A99RY-1C A99SY-1C A99WD-52C A99WD-143C A99WE-143C
ABS, Colour RAL9010 Polycarbonate Brass bulbwell, Polycarbonate enclosure Brass bulbwell, Polycarbonate enclosure Stainless steel bulbwell, Polycarbonate enclosure
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
Rod sensor
94 65,5 52
Cablelength 1,5 m.
38 47
38 47
60
PG13,5
PG13, 5
with bra ss well TS-9 100 -890 5
PG13,5
42
42
Cablelength 2 m.
60
Dimensions
1
NTC "K2" or "K10"
2 3 4
1 3 4
Pt-100 models
Active 010 V models Supply Voltage 15 V DC 5%, Output load max. 2 mA,
Wiring TS-9100 Electronic Sensors and Transducers Selection Table Applications Output Signal Mounting Length in mm. Range (C) DX-9100, DX-9200, *1) TC-9100 SC-9100 TC-9102, TC-8900, Controllers or electronic devices with Pt100 inputs Type-Model Number TS-9101-8101 TS-9101-8103 TS-9101-8104 TS-9101-8212 TS-9101-8213 TS-9101-8214 TS-9101-8222 TS-9101-8223 TS-9101-8224 TS-9101-8225 TS-9101-8226 TS-9101-8227 TS-9101-8232 TS-9101-8233 TS-9101-8234 TS-9101-8235 TS-9101-8252 TS-9101-8253 TS-9101-8254
-4050 X X 040 X X 0...100 X X -20...40 X X 160 0...40 X X 0...100 X X -20...40 X X 0...40 X X 0...100 X X 200 010 VDC 0...150 X X 20120 X X Rod *2) 50150 X X -20...40 X X 0...40 X X 300 0...100 X X 0...150 X X -20...40 X X 500 0...40 X X 0...100 X X *1) Or other electronic devices with 0...10 V inputs. *2) Rod sensors can either be for: - Duct applications (alone) - Immersion applications (with well); see dimension drawings Remote Element 60
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
42
38 47
Page
200 300 500 60 200 500 200 200 300 200 300 500
NTC K2
Rod fast response Outdoor Strap-on Ceiling Bulb Rod *2) Strap-on Rod *2)
20...120 0...120
NTC K10
-20...120 Outdoor Strap-on Ceiling *1) Or other electronic devices with 0...10 V inputs. *2) Rod sensors can either be for: - Duct applications (alone) - Immersion applications (with well); see dimension drawings
Pt 100
Accessories (order separately) Description Material Copper Stainless steel Copper Stainless steel Copper Stainless steel Copper Stainless steel Copper Stainless steel Copper Stainless steel Length (mm) 50 120 150 200 260 50 Max. pressure (Acc. DIN 43763) 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 1600 kPa 4000 kPa 6 mm 9 mm Internal Diam. 6 mm Type-Model Number TS-9100-8905 TS-9100-8915 TS-9100-8901 TS-9100-8911 TS-9100-8907 TS-9100-8917 TS-9100-8902 TS-9100-8912 TS-9100-8903 TS-9100-8913 TS-9100-8905 TS-9100-8915 TS-9100-8950
Immersion well
Duct flange
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
E T
1 2 3 4 5 6 TB2 1 2 3 4 5
1
Pt 100
I+ U+ UI-
2 3 4 5 6
NTC K2
5 6
Used terminals T-Blocks Model RS-9140-0000-W RS-9150-0010-W RS-9160-000x-W RS-9160-001x-W RS-9190-000x-W RS-9191-0005-W
1 x x x x x x
2 x x x x x x
TB1 3 4 x x x x x x x x x x
5 6 1 2 x x x x x x
TB2 3 4 5 6 x x x x x x
NTC K2 models
Used terminals Model RS-9143-0000-W RS-9193-000x-W 1 2 3 4 x x x 5 6 x x x x
010 V models
RS-9100 Electronic Room Temperature Sensors and Transducers Selection Table Output Signal Set point Dial 12/28C -3/+3K 12/28C -3/+3K 12/28C -3/+3K -/+ -3/+3K NTC K2 12/28C -3/+3K Pt100 Mode selection and indication. x x x x x Applications Service Module x x x Sensor location TC-9102, TCU X TC-9100 X X X X X X X X X X SC-9100 X X X X X X X X DX-9100, DX9200, *1) X X X X X Controllers or electronic devices with Pt100 inputs X Type-Model Number RS-9140-0000-W RS-9150-0010-W RS-9160-0000-W RS-9160-0005-W RS-9160-0010-W RS-9160-0015-W RS-9190-0000-W RS-9190-0005-W RS-9190-0006-W RS-9191-0005-W RS-9143-0000-W RS-9193-0000-W RS-9193-0005-W RS-9145-0000-W
010 VDC
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
enclosed
Page
10
Description The HX-9100 Dew Sensor is used to prevent condensation on surfaces such as cold water pipes, cool ceilings and windows. The HX9100 can be connected to Johnson Controls System 91 controllers to provide override functions when condensation is forming. Features Determines precisely the dew point with electronic measurement 010V or open collector output
Red
White
White Red Bue
Bue
+15VDC
HX-9100 Dew point Sensor Dew point Sensor Selection Table Output Open collector 010 VDC
Wiring HX-9100-8001
Wiring HX-9100-9001
Output at 98% 100% RH Open collector open, 15 VDC max., 10 mA max +0.5 V +10 V 5%
Output at 75% RH
Accessories
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
11
B
A19 Series IP30, Capillary and Space Thermostats
3
125
Description These thermostats are available with fixed or adjustable differential. The various control ranges cover a broad range of temperature applications with a minimum number of models. On request a built-in high or low limit stop is possible and can be adjusted quickly and easily in the field. All models have a universal way of adjustment. For this purpose a knob and sealing cap are enclosed. All are equiped with a NEMA1 enclosure All A19 style 1 wholesaler code models have a bulb clamp plus screw also enclosed. Features Liquid filled sensing element Dust tight Penn switch Trip free manual reset Front adjustment Application These thermostats are designed for refrigeration, cooling, heating, ventilation and air-conditioning applications. Standard models are provided for remote sensing or room sensing. Models with manual reset are available for low or high limit functions.
Dimensions
Wiring
Style 2
Style 4H
Style 1a
Style 3
A19A Capillary Thermostats Selection Table Range ( C) Diff. (K) fixed Style Cap. length Bulb size Switch 8A (m) (mm) Auto recycle Additional features Type-Model Number A19AAC -9005 A19AAC -9009
1b 1b 1b 1a 1a 1a 1b 1b 1b
2 2 2 2 2 2 5 3 2
A19AAC -9102
A19AAC-9107 A19AAC 9108 A19AAC 9123* A19AAC-9124 A19AAC -9127 A19AAC -9130
length Bulb size Switch 3A Style Cap. (m) (mm) Auto recycle
0 to 10 5 to 32
1.5 0.8
1a 1b
2 2
80 155
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
12
B
A19 Series IP30 (continued)
2 4H 1b 1b 1b 1b 1a
SPDT Open High 5 A Switch, SPDT Open Low SPDT Open Low SPDT Open High SPDT Open Low SPDT Open High
-14NPT Connector, Universal replacement A19-A5 A19-A4 A19-A1 A19-A2 Diam. 7.4 mm bulb, A19-A3 Max. bulb temp. 85 C
A19ABC -9036 A19ABC -9037 A19ABC -9103 A19ABC -9104 A19ABC -9106 A19ABC -9116 A19ABC-9117 A19ABC-9119
1 to 60
1b
115
A19ACC Capillary thermostat, lock-out low with manual reset Range ( C) Diff. (K) fixed length Bulb size Switch 8A Style Cap. (m) (mm) Manual reset Additional features Wholesale code Type-Model Number A19ACC -9100 A19ACC -9101 A19ACC-9103
6 4 4 6 4 6
1b 1b 1b 1b 1b 1b
2 2 5 3.5 3 5 6.5
110 135 110 135 Low limit stop set at 2 C 110 Low limit stop set at 3 C, A19F Universal replacement SPDT Open High
1
40 to 120
A19ADC -9200
A19B Space Thermostats Selection Table Range ( C) Diff. (K) Style Switch 8A Auto recycle Additional features Wholesale code Type-Model Number A19BAC-9001 A19BAC-9250 A19BAC-9251 A19BBC-9275
2 2.5 2 2.8 to 8
3 3 3 3
SPDT Open High SPDT Open Low SPDT Open Low, 5A Vinyl coated element
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
13
B
A19 Series IP65, Capillary and Space Thermostats
2
125 19
These thermostats are available with fixed or adjustable differential. The various control ranges cover a broad range of temperature applications with a minimum number of models. SPDT contacts are standard on all models.
Features Liquid filled sensing element Dust tight Penn switch IP65 protection class Front adjustment Application
A19A, style 1b
Dimensions
Wiring
These thermostats are designed for applications where a splash-proof and/or dusttight enclosure is required. Four types are available. - Types A19ARC are general purpose capillary thermostats. - Types A19BRC and A19BQC are space thermostats with coiled element to be used as farm control, outdoor thermostats or in cold storage rooms. - Types A19AQF is specially designed for milkcool-tank applications. Type A19AQC-9101 is specially designed for ice-bank application.
Wholesale code Type-Model Number A19ARC -9100 A19ARC -9101 A19ARC-9104 A19ARC 9105 A19ARC 9107
A19A Capillary Thermostats Selection Table Range ( C) Diff. (K) Adjust. Style Cap. length (m) Bulb Switch 8A size Auto recycle (mm) Additional features
-35 to +10 -5 to +28 -20 to +65 5 to 50 40 to 120 1 to 60 -10 to +50 40 to 120 -35 to +40
2.8 to 11 2 to 8 3.5 to 13 2.5 to 11 3.5 to 13.5 2 to 8.5 2.5 to 11 3.5 to 13.5 2.8 to 11
1b 1b 1a 1b 1a 1a 1b 1a 1b
2 2 3.5 2 2 3 2 2 2
110 135 75 110 100 115 110 100 110 SPDT Open Low
A19-AS1 A19-AS2 Diam. 7.4 mm bulb Concealed scale, Screwdriver adjustment, Bulb and cap. rubber coated Maximum bulb temperature 85 C Concealed scale, Screwdriver adjustment, Concealed scale, A19-AS3
A19-AS4
0 to 13
1.5 fixed
1a
80
1a 1b 1b 2 1a 1a
2 2 2 2 3
3 A Switch (see bull. 3545), No enclosure, Cal. pointer with dial, Screwdriver slot, A19AGF -9101* Fig. 3, Case compensation, Bulb diam. 9.3 mm, Bulk pack 5 A Switch, Ice bank control, Bulb diam 9.3 mm, Case compensation, Concealed A19AQC -9101 scale, Screwdriver adjustment, Scale calibrated at increasing temperature Case compensation, Knob adjusyment A19AQC -9104 A19AQC-9102 8 A Switch, calibrated and set at 2C, Case compensation, pointer adjust, PG16 A19AQC-9200 connect., - 14 NPT WELL connector 3 A Switch, Bulb diam. 9.3 mm, Case compensation, Concealed scale, A19AQF -9100 Screwdriver adjustment 3 A Switch, Cap. thermostat, Bulb diam. 9.3 mm, Case compensation, Concealed A19AQF -9102 scale, Screwdriver adjustment
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
14
B
A19 Series IP65 (continued)
3 3 3 3 3
Auto Style Switch recycle
40 to 120 92 to 116
55 26
4.5 2
46.5 6
20 20
8 A Switch, NEMA 1 enclosure, Universal adjustment, Including mounting strap 3 A Switch, Universal adjustment, Including mounting strap
125
Dimensions
55
1
272
Description A rod and tube type sensing element actuates the switch contacts. Main contacts (1 - 2) are normally closed, and open when the temperature at the element rises to the dial setpoint. Contacts are re-closed only by operation of the reset lever. The reset lever is "trip-free" and cannot be used to block contacts in a closed position. Features Rod and tube type of element Adjustable duct mounting flange Trip-free manual reset Dust-tight Penn switch Application These warm air limit controls "lock out" on a temperature increase to the control setpoint. Manual reset is required to re-close the electrical contacts. A typical application is to stop air-conditioning or ventilating fans in the event of excessive return air temperature, as from a fire.
A25
Dimensions
12 5
Wiring
A25 Temperature Limit Control Selection Table Range ( C) Switch 8A Manual reset Additional features Type-Model Number A25CN-9001
0 to 100
Visible scale, Knob adjustment, NEMA 1 enclosure, With flange for duct mounting
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
15
B
A28 Series IP30, Two-stage Capillary and Space Thermostats
3
2
3
1
1
1 2
1 HI LO
Dimensions
Wiring
Description Controls are compact with fixed differential per stage and (on most models) adjustable differential between stages. Liquid filled element provides wide range, constant differential over whole range and no influence from barometric pressure. Since the bulb contains the major portion of the total fill the thermostat may by considered as crossambient, capillary and cup temperature variations affect the operating point only slightly due to the small amount of fill they contain. For quantity orders it is possible to have the below stated optional constructions Without case and cover for panelmounting Close differential per stage Different capillary lengths All standard IP30 enclosure models have a universal way of adjustment. For this purpose a knob and sealing cap are enclosed. Features Liquid filled sensing element Dust tight Penn switch IP65 protection class models available Front adjustment Application These thermostats are designed for various types of heating, cooling, ventilation, or airconditioning applications. All models have two SPDT switches providing the following control possibilities: - 2 stage heating - 2 stage cooling - Heating/cooling with automatic changeover
125
60
59
11 19
125
Dimensions
A28 Capillary and Space Thermostats, IP30, Selection Table Style Cap. length (m) 2 2 5 Bulb size (mm) Switch 5A Additional features Auto recycle NEMA 1 Enclosure Type-Model Number A28AA-9006 A28AA-9007 A28AA-9106 A28AA-9113 A28AA-9118
2 1.5 1.5 2
1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4
1b 1b 3 1b
General purpose Bulb stainless steel, General purpose Max. bulb temp. 85 C, General purpose
A28 Capillary and Space Thermostats, IP65 Diff. (K) Cap. Range ( C) Style length stage betw (m)
Type-Model Number A28QA-9101 A28QA-9110 A28QA-9111 A28QA-9114 A28QA-9113 A28QA-9115 A28QA-9117 A28QJ-9100
4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 5
1b 1b 1b 3 1b 3 1b
2 2 3.5 3 3
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
16
B
A36 Series, 3- or 4-stage Thermostats
62
Description Models are available in 'open' construction for panel mounting. Splash-proof enclosure IP 55 is an accessory. Single knob adjustment moves the entire staging band up and down within the range of the control. The differential on each stage and sequencing between stages are factory set. This permits the OEM to completely engineer the cycling of their equipment without the hazard of field mis-adjustments and erratic sequencing. Features Dust-tight SPDT switches Cushion mounted Operation from a single, liquid filled element Case compensation standard on all models Application Designed for multi-stage thermostatic operation of electrically controlled equipment such as: - packaged liquid chillers - heat pumps - electric duct heaters - computer room airconditioners
69
Dimensions
Blue
White
2
Blue
White
1
Blue
White
3
Blue
White
4
Red
Red
1 2 3 4
Red
Red
Wiring A36 Series, 3-stage Thermostats Selection Table Range ( C) Adjustment Code (see bulletin) Cap. length (m) Bulb size (mm) Switch Auto recycle Additional features Type-Model Number A36AGA-9101
-18 to +20 15 to 35 -18 to +20 -18 to +20 -16 to +20 15 to 35 10 to 95 -18 to +20 -15 to +30
B1 C1 B2 B1 B1 C1 D2 B2 B2
5A
A36AGA-9102 A36AGA-9103
3.5
3A
A36AGB-9103
125 125 140 100 125 125 110 3A Max. bulb temp.115 C Armored PVC capillary Braided Copper capillary Max. bulb temp. 75 C 5A Armored PVC capillary
A36AHA -9105 A36AHA -9107 A36AHA-9108 A36AHB -9103 A36AHB -9104 A36AHB--9105 A36AHB -9109
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
17
B
270XT Series Freeze Protection Control, IP30
101
53
2
62
32
1
44
270XT-95008, style 9
Dimensions
Wiring
270XT Series Freeze Protection Control Selection Table Range ( C) Diff. (K) Fixed Style Cap. length (m) Bulb size (mm) Switch 8A Additional features Type-Model Number 270XT - 95008
3 4 -
9 1 9 1(bulb)
2 2
3.2 x 6000 3.2 x 3000 9.5 x 80 3.2 x 6000 3.2 x 3000 9.5 x 80
270XT - 95078 270XT - 95068 270XTAN - 95008 270XTAN - 95088 270XTAN - 95048
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
18
B
T22 and T25 One and Two-stage Room Thermostat, Line Voltage , IP20
Dimensions
3
2
3
1
1
1 2
1 HI LO Wiring T25
Wiring T22
Description These thermostats with a sturdy steel cover are provided with a liquid filled sensing element. This element is formed to achieve maximum sensitivity to surrounding air temperature changes. Coupled with a highly efficient diaphragm and leverage mechanism, the element operates a totally enclosed Penn switch contact with a close differential switching action without the use of heat or cool anticipators. Features Liquid filled elements. Dust tight Penn switch. Small differential. Two Stage Thermostats with dead band and automatic change-over. Application These room thermostats are designed to control heating and/or cooling equipment, in commercial industrial or residential installations. Typical uses are for unit heaters, fan coils, cooling rooms etc. Type T22SRX can be used for either heating or cooling. Type T25B (2 stages) can be used for: two stages heating two stages cooling heating/cooling with dead band and automatic change over
T22 One-stage Room Thermostat Selection Table Range ( C) Diff. (K) Fixed 1 Adjustment Knob Concealed T25 Two-stage Room Thermostat Range ( C) Diff. (K) Stage Betw. Adjustment Knob 5 to 32 1 1 to 3 Knob Thermometer SPDT Open High Concealed scale, screwdriver adjustment With 220 V ac signal lamp to be wired separately Switch 3A Additional features Automatic recycle Type-Model Number T25B-9101 T25B-9102 T25B-9103 Thermometer Switch 3A Yes SPDT Open High Additional features Type-Model Number T22SRX-9100 Automatic recycle T22SRX-9101 T22SRX-9104
5 to 32
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
133
Page
19
B
T36 3- and 4-stage Room Thermostat, Line Voltage , IP20
Dimensions
Blue
White
2
Blue
White
1
Blue
White
3
Blue
White
4
Red
Red
1 2 3 4
Red
Red
Wiring T36 3- and 4-stage Room Thermostat Selection Table Range ( C) Number of stages Dead band Switch 3A
Description The differentials on each stage and the sequencing between stages are factory set and are not field adjustable. A single adjustment moves the entire staging band up or down within the range of the control. The sensing element is a liquid filled, coiled copper tube and each stage of control provides single pole, double throw switching. Features Concealed adjustment. Enclosure can be locked. Dust-tight Penn switch. Multi-stage heating and/or cooling with one model. Application These room or space thermostats are designed to control heating and/or cooling equipment in stages. They can be used for either heating only or cooling only or for various combinations of heating and cooling stages with a neutral zone. These controls are designed for wall mounting but can be mounted in any position.
121
Additional features
0 to 43 0 to 43
3 4
2C
Accessories
Closed tank connector style 1b elements, Max. 10 bar, 120c, Min. -40c Capillary brackets (6 pieces) Base and cover Fey for Thermostat guard Bulb well, Max. pressure 70 bar, Temp. 370C Bulb well, Max. pressure 20 bar, Temp. 120C, USA item Bulb well, Max. pressure 69 bar, Temp. 370C, USA item Bulb well, Max. pressure 20 bar, Temp. 120C, USA item Bulb well, Max. pressure 20 bar, Temp. 120C, USA item Bulb well, Max. pressure 20 bar, Temp. 120C, USA item *Quantity orders only
9.8 x 125 A19 A19/28/36 A19/28/36 A19/28/36 A19/28/36 7.3 x 60 11.2 X 120 9.8 x 125 9.8 x 147 9.5 x 71
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
20
C
2 3
Description The F61 liquid flow switches can be used in liquid lines carrying water, sea water, swimming pool water, ethylene glycol or other liquids not harmful to the specified materials. The switches have SPDT contacts and can be wired to energise one device and de-energise another when liquid flow either exceeds or drops below the set flow rate. Pipe insert models and the T-body types for low-flow applications are available. The IP43 versions can be used for liquid temperatures above dewpoint (for use in other environments see the Product Data Sheet). Typical applications are to shut down the compressor on liquid chiller systems, to prove flow on electric immersion heaters and to give a signal or alarm when the pump on condenser cooling system shuts down. Features T-body and Pipe-insert types available Polycarbonate IP43 enclosure Vapour tight IP 67 enclosure Stainless steel Pipe-insert type Large wiring space Range screw easy accessible. Type-Model Number F61SB-9100 F61SB-9103 F61SB-9107 F61SD-9150 F61SD-9175
61
29
51
60
38
Dimensions
Wiring
F61 Flow Switches, IP43, Selection Table Range Connection Switch Action
SPDT Contacts,15 (8) amp 220 V~
Additional features
3 paddles 1, 2, 3 phosphor bronze 4 paddles, 1, 2, 3 phosphor bronze and 6 St.St. AISI 301 1 paddle, 1, phosphor bronze Dryseal
/4-14 NPTF
4 paddles, 1, 2, 3 phosphor bronze and 6 St.St. AISI 301 stainless steel body,bellow,rod, 3 St.St. AISI 304 paddles 1,2,3
F61TB-9100 F61TB-9200
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
21
C
3
Description The F62 airflow switch detects air flow or the absence of air flow by responding only to the velocity of air movement within a duct. The control can be wired to open one circuit and close a second circuit (SPDT) for either signaling or interlock purposes. Failure of air flow during normal operation of air handling systems may cause over-heating, coil icing and other conditions that may be detrimental to the equipment. Typical applications include make-up air systems, air cooling or heating processes and exhaust systems. Features Polycarbonate IP43 enclosure Large wiring space Range screw easily accessible. Type-Model Number
60
62
196
Dimensions
Wiring
F62 Air Flow Switches, IP43, Selection Table Max. air velocity Switch Action Enclosure Additional features
10 m/sec
Plastic enclosure IP 43
26 60 61 55 215 / 225
Dimensions
Wiring
Description The F63 is a liquid level float switch for use in open or closed tanks where a desired liquid level has to be maintained and installations handling water, swimming pool water, sea water, brine, ethylene glycol or other liquids not harmful to the specified materials. The switches have SPDT contacts and can be wired to close one circuit and open a second circuit when the liquid level rises above or falls below the required level. The switch maintains the liquid level within (approx.) 13 mm. There are three different types available. The phosphor bronze bellows version for use in applications where the liquid is not corrosive to phosphor bronze. The stainless steel bellows version for use in environments like cooling towers ( water with high calcium content) and a complete stainless steel AISI 316L version. These float switches should not be used for liquids lighter than water ( density less than 0.95 kg/dm3). Features Solid polycarbonate float Vapour tight IP 67 enclosure Convenient wiring terminals Type-Model Number F63BT-9101 F63BT-9102 F63BT-9200
F63 Level Switches, Selection Table Connection Switch Action Enclosure Additional features
1-11 NPT SPDT Contacts 15(8) A, 220V~ 1 R (ISO R228) For accessories, see Section Accessories Plastic enclosure IP 67
Plastic float, Brass body, Phosphor bronze bellows Plastic float, Stainless steel bellows Plastic float, Stainless steel 316 L body, rod, bellow
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
22
F61 - 6" Stainless steel AISI 301 paddle F61 - 3 paddles 1", 2", 3" phosphor bronze F61 - paddle 6" phosphor bronze F61 - 4 paddles 1", 2", 3" and 6" St.St. AISI 301 F62 Airflow plate 154 mm F62 Airflow plate 80 mm F63 - float
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
23
Description The PT-5215 Differential Air Pressure Transmitter accurately measures low differential pressure and converts the measurement into a standard proportional 0...10 V signal. (for -50...+50 Pa operating range optional 4-20 mA). The PT-5215 is especially adapted to measure static, velocity and differential pressures. Features Low zero drift/time Low sensibility to ambient temperature change Low hysteresis High accuracy Good overrangeability Splash proof dust tight case Compact enclosure, light weight, simple and quick installation
P1
PT-5215-7300
Dimensions
P
E
+
O
Supply, 24 VAC or 13,5...33 VDC 0...10 V Output Common for supply and output
Wiring PT-5215-7300 Low Differential Air Pressure Transmitter Selection Table Operating Range Maximum overload pressure Output Signal Enclosure Supply Voltage Type-Model Number PT-5215-7307 PT-5215-7308 PT-5215-7309 PT-5215-7310
24 VAC 15%, 50/60Hz or 1133VDC, max. 10 mA 24 VAC 15%, 50/60Hz or 13,533VDC, max. 10 mA
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
P2
6,2
10,5
PG11
18
75
Page
24
Dimensions
Brown: Supply, 24 VAC or 18...33 VDC
E
White: Common for supply and output 1,5 m. shielded cable
Wiring PT-5217 Liquid or Air Pressure Transmitter Selection Table Operating Range Maximum overload pressure Enclosure Supply Voltage Type-Model Number PT-5217-7011 PT-5217-7101
IP65
Mounting kit for plastic hose 4 x 6 mm Mounting kit for DIN rail
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
25
Wire c olour / te rmina l ide ntificat ion DIN 436 50 conne ct or P299 x Rx P299 x Ax
1
35 28 15
2 3
26,5
Earth
Not connected
Dimensions
Wiring
Description The P299 Series Electronic Pressure Transmitter is a compact, economical, rugged pressure transmitter designed to produce a linear analogue signal based on the sensed pressure. They are designed for use in commercial and industrial refrigeration and airconditioning applications. The P299 transmitter features a welded stainless steel construction with environmentally sealed electronics. It is resistant to the effects of wide temperature swings, high humidity, condensation, and icing. It is suitable for use with all noncorrosive refrigerants as well as ammonia. P299 Transmitters are available in several pressure ranges (up to 50 bar), covering most common refrigeration and air conditioning applications. Features Rugged Stainless Steel Construction Environmentally Sealed Electronics Reliable, Repeatable Performance and Long Operating Life Available in Several Pressure Ranges (up to 50 bar) Sensor contains a minimum of components. All functions, including sensor conditioning and signal processing are included in one chip Type-Model Number P299DAB-1C P299DAC-1C P299EAB-1C P299EAC-1C P299FAB-1C P299FAC-1C P299DVB-1C P299DVC-1C P299EVB-1C P299EVC-1C P299FVB-1C P299FVC-1C P299DRC-1C P299ERC-1C P299FRC-1C P299DVB-2C P299EVB-2C P299DAB-2C P299EAB-2C P299DAC-2C P299EAC-2C P299HAC-2C P299HVC-2C P299DVC-2C P299EVC-2C
P299 Pressure Transducer Selection Table Range (bar) Output Connection Style Electrical Connection Additional features
-1 to +8 0 to 30 0 to 50 -1 to +8 0 to 30 0 to 50 -1 to +8 0 to 30 0 to 50 -1 to +8 0 to 30 -1 to +8 0 to 30 -1 to +8 0 to 30 -1 to 15 -1 to 8 0 to 30
4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 0,5 to 4,5V 0,5 to 4,5V 0,5 to 4,5V 0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
male female male female male female male female male female male female female female female male male male male female female female female female female
2m shielded cable
Continuous overpressure: Range -1 to +8 bar: 12 bar Range 0 to 30 bar: 45 bar Range 0 to 50 bar: 75 bar Can be used with all media which are compatible with stainless steel 17-4PH Accuracy: 1% full scale for hysteresis, offset repeatibility 1% full scale for temperature effects
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
P299 xVx
Ca ble
Page
26
PS-9101-800x (IP20)
Dimensions
PS-9101-850x (IP54)
Dimensions
PS-9101 Differential pressure transmitter Selection Table Operating Range Maximum overload pressure Enclosure Supply voltage Type-Model Number PS-9101-8001 PS-9101-8002
34.5 kPa
Inline Air Filter (required for all models) Romote probe kit DIN rail mounting kit
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
27
141
71
Dimensions
Wiring
Description This switch senses a change in the differential pressure (either velocity pressure or pressure drop across a restriction) as the air flow changes. The pressure, as sensed by two sensing ports, is applied to the two sides of a diaphragm in the control. The spring loaded diaphragm moves and actuates the switch. The series P32 can also be used to detect small positive gauge pressure by using only the high pressure connection and leaving the low pressure connector open, or to detect a vacuum by using only the low pressure connection and leaving the high pressure connector open to ambient pressure. Features Easy to read set point scale. Wiode range (1 to 125 mm W.C.) Small differential (1 mm W.C. at bottom of range. Large wiring space Versatile mounting options Application This (differential) pressure switch is used to sense flow of air, single or differential air pressure. Typical applications include: - Clogged filter detection. - Detection of frost on air conditioning coils and initiation of defrost cycle. - Air proving in heating or ventilation ducts. - Maximum air flow controller for variable air volume system. Type-Model Number P32AJ -1C P32AJ -2C
55
P32 Sensitive Differential Pressure Controls Selection Table Range (mbar) Differential (mbar) Calibration position diaphragm Additional Features
0.23 0.23
13
vertical vertical
24
Mounting bracket "U" type included Mounting bracket "L" type included
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
28
72
60
62
60
4 mm
46
Dimensions
>
3 COM
Wiring
Description This switch senses a change in the (differential) pressure as the airflow changes. The (differential) pressure is applied to the two sides of a diaphragm in the control. The spring-loaded diaphragm moves and actuates the switch. The series P233A/F can also be used to detect small positive gauge pressure or to detect a vacuum. Features One switch to measure relative pressure, vacuum or differential pressure Various accessories available Compact and durable construction Easy mounting and wiring, various mounting possibilities Standard PG 11 nipple and optional DIN 43650 connector Accurate and stable switch point SPDT contact standard Application This (differential) pressure switch is used to sense flow of air, single or differential air pressure. Typical applications include: - Detect clogged filter - Detect frost or ice build-up on air conditioning coils - Air proving in heating or ventilation ducts. - Maximum airflow controller for variable air volume system. - Detect blocked flue or vent - Monitor fan operation Type-Model Number P233F-P3-AAD* P233A-4-AAC P233A-4-AAD*
P233 Sensitive Differential Pressure Controls Selection Table Switch point Range (mbar) Switching Differential (mbar) ** Contacts Pack Additional Features
GMT008N600R + BKT024N001R Scale in Pa Scale in Pa, GMT008N600R + BKT024N001R FTG015N602R (2x) + 2m tube 4/7mm
ind.
bilk GMT008N600R + BKT024N001R ind. Scale in Pa, FTG015N602R (2x) + 2m tube 4/7mm bulk Ind. GMT008N600R + BKT024N001R FTG015N602R (2x) + 2m tube 4/7mm
140 to 1000 Pa
< 0.5
1,4 to 10 6 to 50 <1
* Quantity orders only ** Switching differential is maximum value mid-range For accessories, see Section Accessories
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
29
Pressure Controls
19 67 85
3
37 56
1
17.5 26
Dimensions
Wiring LP
Wiring HP
Description The P20 series high and low limit (cut-out) controls for all non-corrosive refrigerants are compact pressure controls ideally suited for commercial or residential packaged air conditioning units, heat pumps, small water chillers, ice cube machines and other applications where a semi fixed setting is acceptable or required and where mounting space is limited. The P20 series includes auto reset as well as manual reset models and is factory set. A special setting tool is available while also field (screwdriver) adjustable models can be chosen. Features Field proven reliability. Reset tab must be released before restart. (Trip free manual reset). Compact design. Enclosed dust-tight switch. SPDT contact with special terminals. Test pressure 53 bar. Designed for at least 300000 cycles.
Style 34
Style 45A
Style 50 Capillary Length Switch Action PED approval Type-Model Number P20EA -9120C P20EA -9120H P20EA-9120K P20EA -9120N P20EA -9130C P20EA-9510E P20EA -9610A P20EA -9610B P20EA -9610C P20EA -9610D P20EA -9610E P20EA -9610F P20EA -9611A P20EA -9611C P20EA -9611D P20EA -9611F P20EA -9620C P20EA -9620D P20EA -9620E P20EA -9620F P20EA -9621D P20EA -9621F P20EA -9630C P20EA -9640C P20EA -9640D P20EA -9910F P20EA -9910Q P20EA -9910S P20EA -9920F P20EA -9930F
0.9
1.5
1.5 2.1 Quantity orders only For accessories, see Section Accessories
1.5 4 4.5 6 1.5 2.5 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 0.5 1.5 2 3 1.5 2 2.5 3 2 3 1.5 1.5 2 3 7 8 3 3
45A
50
90 cm
0.5 to 10
120 cm 13 90 cm
No
120 cm
90 cm 34
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
30
Pressure Controls
P20 High Pressure Control Selection Table Range (bar) Differential fixed Set at (bar) Style Capillary Length Switch Action PED approval Type-Model Number P20EA -9160L P20EA -9170D P20EA -9170E P20EA -9170M P20EA -9170Q P20EA -9170X P20EA -9550K P20EA -9550M P20EA -9560D P20EA -9560Y P20EA -9561K P20EA -9561U
SPDT, 8 A, Open High, Auto reset
3.1 4.2 4.3 4.6 4.8 5.2 1.2 1.3 2.8 3.5 1.2 3.4 5.2 7.3 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.1 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.5 7.0 7.3 7.5 6.5 6.6
17 11 12 18 21 28 16 18 11 29 16 25 28 26 11 14 18 11 13 17 18 16 17 18 19 23 26 28 18 23 26 28 17 19
45A
50
P20EA -9570X P20EA -9583V P20EA -9650D P20EA -9650G P20EA -9650M P20EA -9660D P20EA -9660F P20EA -9660L P20EA -9660M P20EA -9670K P20EA -9670L P20EA -9670M P20EA -9670N P20EA -9670S P20EA -9670V P20EA -9670X P20EA -9680M P20EA -9680S P20EA -9680V P20EA -9680X P20EA -9681L P20EA -9681N
7 to 29
90 cm
Yes
13
120 cm
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
31
Pressure Controls
P20 High Pressure Control Selection Table Range (bar) Differential fixed Set at (bar) Style Capillary Length Switch Action PED approval Type-Model Number P20EA -9681P
20 24 9 10
13
120 cm
11 13 16 18 20 8 10 16 20 23 24 25 29 34 90 cm
Yes
P20EA -9950P P20EA -9951A P20EA -9960C P20EA -9960K P20EA -9960P P20EA -9960S P20EA -9960T P20EA -9960U P20EA -9960Y
PED approval
3 3
50 13
Open Low, Universal replacement, individual pack Open Low, Bulkpack Open High, Universal replacement, individual pack
No
9 28 28
90 cm 50 13
Yes
P20EA -9670X
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
32
Pressure Controls
P20 Low and High Pressure Control Universal ReplacementsSelection Table Range (bar) Set at (bar) Style Capillary Length Switch Action SPDT, 8A Manual Reset Additional Features PED approval Type-Model Number P20FA -9610B*
1 2 3 0.5 3 3 28 16 25 28 15 18 19 20 22 24 25 28 19 21 25 28 29 16 24 25 28 29 24 31 28 28 26
0.5 to 10
13
P20FA -9610D* P20FA -9610F* P20FA -9611A* P20FA -9510FC P20FA -9610FC P20GA -9150X* P20GA -9550K* P20GA -9550U* P20GA -9550X* P20GA -9650H* P20GA 9650M* P20GA -9650N* P20GA -9650P* P20GA -9650R* P20GA -9650T*
50 13 45A 50
90 cm
7 to 29
13
P20GA -9650U* P20GA -9650X* P20GA -9651N* P20GA -9651Q* P20GA -9651U* P20GA -9651X* P20GA -9651Y* P20GA -9950K* P20GA -9950T* P20GA -9950U* P20GA -9950X*
120 cm
Open High
Yes
Wrench adjustment
34 90 cm
14 to 41
7 to 29
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
33
P28 Series
Dimensions
3 1
220 L M A
Description These controls measure the pressure differential between the pressure generated by the oil pump and the refrigerant pressure at the crankcase. A built-in time delay switch allows for pressure-pick up on start and avoids nuisance shutdowns on pressure drops of short duration during the running cycle. When the compressor is started, the time delay switch is energised. If the net oil pressure does not build up within the required time limit, the time delay switch trips to stop the compressor. If the net oil pressure rises within the required time after the compressor starts, the time delay switch is automatically de-energised and the compressor continues to operate normally. If the net oil pressure should drop below setting (scale pointer) during the running cycle, the time delay switch is energised and, unless the net oil pressure returns to cut-in point within the time delay period, the compressor will be shut down, and have to be manual reset. The compressor can never run longer than the predetermined time on low oil pressure. Controls are available only for manual reset after cut-out. Features Heavy duty pressure elements Safety lock-out with trip-free manual reset Ambient compensated timing Dust-tight Penn switch Application These oil protection controls are designed to give protection against low net lube oil pressure on pressure lubricated refrigeration compressors.
Wiring (3 - wires) P28 Oil Protection Controls Selection Table Range (bar) Style Time Delay (s)
20
82
Style 5
Style 13
Style 15
Additional Features
Type-Model Number
115/230
15(8) A, 230 Vac, Open Low, Alarm and Safe Light Contacts
5 13 15 5 5 5 15
0.6 to 4.8
50 90 50 -90 120 90
5 -5 50 5 90 230 5 120 5 120 13 50 13 90 13 120 15 50 15 90 15 50 115/230 For accessories, see Section Accessories
non-corr.
NH3
Incl. plastic PG nipple 13.5 + 2 flare nuts P28DA -9341 P28DA -9660 Concealed adjustment, set 1,5 bar P28DA -9750 P28DJ -9300 IP 66 enclosure, P28DJ -9360 IP 66 enclosure, Without time relay P28DJ -9380 IP 66 enclosure, Incl. 2 connectors P28DJ -9861 CNR003N001 Without time delay P28DP -9300 P28DP -9340 P28DP -9360 P28DP -9380 Concealed adjustment, set 0.65 bar P28DP -9381 P28DP -9640 P28DP -9660 P28DP -9680 P28DP -9840 P28DP -9860 P28DN -9750 Concealed adjustment, set 1,5 bar
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
34
Description The series P45 controls are designed to give protection against low lube-oil pressure on pressure lubricated refrigeration compressors. The controls measure the pressure differential (net oil pressure) between the pressure generated by the oil pump and the refrigerant pressure at the crankcase. A built-in time delay switch allows pressure build-up during start and avoids nuisance shut-down on pressure drops of short duration during the running cycle. Features Several million in use today. Heavy duty pressure elements. Key specifications match/exceed other brands. Accurate 0.2 bar switch differential standard. Adjustable or fixed setpoint. Safelight output standard. Trip-free manual reset. High current rated output. Ambient compensated timing.
83
Dimensions
230 2 M
P >
5 3
11 5 S
Wiring (3 - wires)
Style 5
Style 13
P45 Oil Protection Controls Control Selection Table Range (bar) Setting (bar) Time Delay (s) Style Voltage Type-Model Number P45NBB -9341B P45NBB -9361B P45NBB -9361C P45NBB -9381B P45NBB -9461X*
0.6 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.65 0.6 0.5 0.7 1.8 0.7 0.8 1.8 0.5 0.7 0.45 0.7 0.45
51 230
Alarm/Safelight Contacts
P45NBB -9560C P45NBB -9640A P45NBB -9640C P45NBB -9640Q P45NBB -9660C P45NBB -9660D P45NBB -9660Q P45NBB -9680A P45NBB -9680C P45NCA -9056
0.5 to 4
13
13
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
35
1
39
Dimensions
Wiring P74EA/FA
L2
L1
M2
Wiring P74DA P74 Differential Pressure Controls Selection Table Range (bar) Mech. Differential (bar) Style Switch Action
M1
Description The P74 series of differential pressure switches incorporate two opposing pressure elements and an adjustable range setpoint spring with a calibrated scale. The control switches at the indicated setpoint on an increase in differential pressure and switches back to the normal position when the different pressure decreases to the setpoint less the mechanical switching differential. Features Heavy duty pressure elements. These controls may be used in combination with series P28 lube oil protection control on two compressor, single motor units. Application These controls are designed to sense pressure differences between two points and may be used as operating or limit controls. Typical applications are to detect flow across a chiller or water cooled condenser, to detect flow in a heating system and sensing lube oil pressure differential on refrigeration compressors.
83
Additional Features
Type-Model Number P74DA 9300 P74DA 9600 P74EA 9300 P74EA 9600
0.6 to 4.8 0.6 to 4.8 0.6 to 4.8 0.6 to 4.8 0.6 to 4.8 0.6 to 4.8 0 to 1 2 to 8
0.7 to 2 adj. 0.7 to 2 adj. 0.3 fix. 0.3 fix. 0.3 fix. 0.3 fix. 0.1 fix. 0.7 fix.
5 13 5 13
for NH3 Set 1 bar, concealed adjustment, for NH3 for water For NH3
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
36
Pressure Controls
88 53
B
80
Dimensions
Wiring
Description The P48 series have been developed for special applications where pressure must be controlled. All models have an adjustable differential depending on the range (see type number selection table).The P48AAA-9110 and P48AAA-9120 has the power element outside the case. All the models have phosphor bronze bellows and brass pressure connections except the P48AAA-9150. This model has a stainless steel bellows and pressure connection and is provided with a brass adapter -18 NPT female to R3/8 male. Features Generous wiring space provided Splash-proof enclosure (IP54) SPDT contacts are provided as standard on single pressure control Trip-free manual reset Application The series P48 pressure controls are designed as operating or high/low cut-out control on steam, air or (hot) water applications. Also for non-combustible gases which are not harmful to the materials in contact with these mediums. On steam applications a steam trap is recommended (see Accessories).
P48 Steam Pressure Controls Selection Table Range (bar) Differential Pressure (bar) Connection Style Switch Action
~16(10)A 400 V 220 V DC, 12 W (pilot duty only) SPDT, Open High
66
29
Aditional Features
0.16 to 0.55
G 3/8 male
NO automatic reset YES automatic reset , stainless steel bellows manual reset automatic reset NO YES NO
P48AAA 9110 P48AAA 9120 P48AAA 9130 P48AAA 9140 P48AAA 9150 P48BEA 9120 P48BEA -9140* P48AAA 9230*
G fem. special
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
29a
Page
37
P735 Single Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications
Pressure Controls
Description The P735 series pressure controls may be used for control functions or limit functions, depending on model number. All models are provided with alarm contacts. All standard models have phosphor bronze bellows and brass pressure connections. Models for use with ammonia are provided with stainless steel bellows and connectors. Features Generous wiring space SPDT contacts are provided as standard on single pressure controls. Trip-free manual reset Application These pressure controls are designed for use in a variety of applications involving refrigeration high or low pressure. Models supplied have a whole range design, enabling them to be used with all noncorrosive refrigerants which are within the operating range of the control. They may also be used for other high or low pressure applications such as air, water etc. Models which can be used with ammonia are included in the program.
Style 5
Dimensions
C Line ~ max. 20 A A B
Style 15
B
Line ~ max. 20 A
Wiring Diagram 1
Wiring Diagram 2
Wiring Diagram 3
Style 30
P735 Pressure controls for Water Selection Table Range (bar) Switch Differential Action (bar) (wire diag.) Max. Bellows Pressure Family Code Special Pressue Connection Gfemale Ind. Pack. P735AAA -9200 -9201 Style 5 Ind. Pack. -9300 P735AAA -9301 -9350 -9351 P735BCA P735BEA -9300 -9350 -9370 -9371 -9320 -9370 -9450 -9451 -9400 -9450 -9320 Style 30 Bulkpack Ind. Pack. -9400 PED approval
-0,2 to 10 -0,5 to 7
1 to 4,5 0,5 to 3
1 1
15 22
NO
P735 Pressure controls for Non-corrosive refrigerants Selection Table Range (bar) Switch Differential Action (bar) (wire diag.) Max. Bellows Pressure Family Code PED approval
1 1 2 2 1 3
22 15 33 30 22 33
NO
** Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point * Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point P735 Pressure controls for NH3 Selection Table
Range (bar) Switch Differential Action (bar) (wire diag.) Max. Bellows Pressure Family Code Style 15 Ind. Pack. -9700 -9750 -9700 -9750 -9770 Bulkpack PED approval
-0.5 to 7 3 to 30 -0.5 to 7 3 to 30
1 2 1 3
20 33 20 33
NO
** Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point * Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point Note: 100 kPa = 1 bar 14.5 psi
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
38
P735 Single Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications (continued)
Pressure Controls
P735 Pressure controls for Non-corrosive refrigerants Selection Table Range (bar) Switch Differential Action (bar) (wire diag.) Max. Bellows Pressure Family Code P735AAW P735BCB P735BEB P735BES Style 5 Ind. Pack. -9300 -9350 -9300 -9350 -9350 -9370 -9370 -9850 -9370 Style 28 Bulkpack Ind. Pack. -9800 -9850 PED approval
-0.5 to 7 3 to 30 -0,5 to 7 3 to 30 3 to 30
1 2 1 3 3
20 33 20 33 33
** Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point * Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point P735 Pressure controls for NH3 Selection Table Switch Range Differential Max. Bellows Action (bar) (bar) Pressure (wire diag.) 3 to 30 3 to 30 * 3.5 to 12 Man. res.* 2 3 33 33
PED approval
Yes Yes
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
39
P736 Dual Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications
Pressure Controls
Description The P736 series pressure controls may be used for control functions or limit functions, depending on model number. All models are provided with alarm contacts (except P736ALA). All standard models have phosphor bronze bellows and brass pressure connections. Models for use with ammonia are provided with stainless steel bellows and connectors. Features Generous wiring space Trip-free manual reset Separate alarm contacts for both low pressure and high pressure cut-out (except P736ALA) Application These dual pressure controls are designed for use in a variety of applications involving refrigeration high or low pressure. Models supplied have a whole range design, enabling them to be used all non-corrosive refrigerants which are within the operating range of the control. They may also be used for other high or low pressure applications such as air, water etc. Models which can be used with ammonia are included in the program. Style 30
Style 5
Dimensions
Style 15
L ine ~ max. 20 A
D C
Line ~ max . 2 0 A
LP
HP
HP
HP
B
M1 M2
Wiring Diagram Left Side Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Right Side Range (bar)
Wiring Diagram P736ALA Contruction Family LP/HP Diff. (bar) (max. press.) Code P736LCA
P736 Dual pressure controls for Non-corrosive refrigerants Selection Table PED approvals
Bulkpack Ind. Pack. -9320 -9320 **** -9320 -9400 -9400 -9400
3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30
3 (fixed) Man. res.** Auto reset Man. res.** LP: 22bar HP: 33 bar
NO
Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point
P736 Dual pressure controls for Ammonia and Non-corrosive refrigerants Selection Table Left Side Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Right Side Range (bar) Contruction Family LP/HP Diff. (bar) (max. press.) Code Style 15 Ind. Pack. Bulkpack **** **** **** PED approvals
3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30
NO
Can be set-up for quantity orders Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point
P736 Dual pressure Fan cycling controls for Air-cooled condensers (Non-corrosive refrigerants)Selection Table Left Side Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Right Side Range (bar) Contruction Family HP/HP Diff. (bar) (max. press.) Code Style 5 Ind. Pack. Style 30 PED approvals
3.5 to 21
1.8 (fixed)
3.5 to 21
1.8 (fixed)
30 bar
P736ALA -9351
NO
**** Can be set-up for quantity orders Note: 100 kPa = 1 bar 14.5 psi
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
40
P736 Dual Pressure Controls for Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and Heatpump Applications (contimued)
Pressure Controls
P736 Dual pressure controls for Non-corrosive refrigerants Selection Table Left Side Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Right Side Range (bar) Contruction Family LP/HP Diff. (bar) (max. press.) Code P736LCW Style 5 Ind. Pack. -9300 -9300 -9300 -9300 Style 28 PED approvals Bulkpack Ind. Pack. -9320 **** **** **** -9800 -9800 -9800
3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30
3 (fixed) Man. res.** Man. res.** Man. res.** LP: 22bar HP: 33 bar
E
Yes
P736 Dual pressure Manual reset HP/HP, TV-Begrenzer + Sicherheitsbegrenzer Selection Table Left Side Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Right Side Range (bar) Contruction Family HP/HP Diff. (bar) (max. press.) Code Style 5 Ind. Pack. Style 30 PED approvals
3 to 30
Man. res.**
3 to 30
Man. res.**
30 bar
P736PLM
Yes
**** Can be set-up for quantity orders ** Resetable at 3 bar below cut-out point * Resetable at 0.5 bar above cut-out point Note: 100 kPa = 1 bar 14.5 psi
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
41
Pressure Controls
88 53
22.5
80
Style 5
Dimensions
Style 28
C Line ~ max. 20 A A B
M
Line ~ max. 20 A A
B Line ~ A max. 20 A C
Style 30
Description The P77 series pressure controls may be used for control functions or limit functions, depending on model number. All models are provided with alarm contacts. All standard models have phosphor bronze bellows and brass pressure connections. Models for use with ammonia are provided with stainless steel bellows and connectors. Devices conforming to DIN 32733 have a double bellows on the high pressure versions. Their IP54 classification means that these pressure controls are suitable for almost all applications. Features Generous wiring space Splash-proof enclosure (IP54) SPDT contacts are provided as standard on single pressure controls. Trip-free manual reset Application These pressure controls are designed for use in a variety of applications involving refrigeration high or low pressure. Models supplied have a whole range design, enabling them to be used with refrigerants R22, R134A, R404A and all other noncorrosive refrigerants which are within the operating range of the control. They may also be used for other high or low pressure applications such as air, water etc. Models which can be used with ammonia as well as controls tested, conforming to DIN 32733, and approved by TV are included in the program.
P77 Pressure Controls Selection Table Range (bar) Differential Wiring/ (bar) Action Style Pack. Refr. Additional Features W-sale Code Type-Model number P77AAA-9300 P77AAA-9301 P77AAA-9302 P77AAA-9320* P77AAA-9321* P77AAA-9322* P77AAA-9350 P77AAA-9351 P77AAA-9370* P77AAA-9371* P77AAA-9379* P77AAA-9400 P77AAA-9450 P77AAA-9451 P77AAA-9700 P77AAA-9750 P77AAA-9770* P77AAA-9800 P77AAA-9850 PED approval
-0.5 to +7 -0.2 to 10 -0.3 to +2 -0.5 to +7 -0.2 to 10 -0.3 to +2 3 to 30 3.5 to 21 3 to 30 3.5 to 21 3 to 30 -0.5 to 7 3 to 30 3.5 to 21 -0.5 to +7 3 to 30 3 to 30 -0.5 to +7 3 to 30
0.5 to 3 1 to 4.5 0.4 to 1.5 0.5 to 3 1 to 4.5 0.4 to 1.5 3 to 12 2 to 5.5 3 to 12 2 to 5.5 3 to 12 0.5 to 3 3 to 12 2 to 5.5 0.5 to 3 3 to 12 3 to 12 0.5 to 3 3 to 12
P77L ind. 1 bulk 5 ind. 2 bulk 1 2 1 2 1 2 15 bulk 28 ind. noncorr. NH3 P77AAA-9750 bulk pack P77AAA-9300 solder connection 6 mm ODM P77AAA-9350 solder connection 6 mm ODM 30 ind. noncorr. Is P77AAA-9350 bulk pack Is P77AAA-9351 bulk pack Factory setting 10 bar, differential 3,5 bar P77AAA-9300 with solder connection ODF P77AAA-9350 solder connection ODF P77AAA-9351 solder connection ODF Is P77AAA-9300 bulk pack Is P77AAA-9301 bulk pack Is P77AAA-9302 bulk pack P77H P77A
No
Pressure Controls
P77 Pressure Controls Automatic Recycle,TV-Wchter Selection Table Range (bar) Diff. (bar) Wiring/ Action Style Pack. Refr. Additional Features W-sale Code Type-Model number P77AAW-9300 PED approval
0.5 to 3 0.5 to 3 0.5 to 3 3.5 to 12 3.5 to 12 2 3.5 to 12 3.5 to 12 0.5 to 3 3.5 to 12 0.5 to 3 3.5 to 12 3.5 to 12 2 1 2 1 bulk 15 NH3 P77AAW-9300 with solder connection 6 mm ODM P77AAW-9350 with solder connection 6 mm ODM Gold plated contacts; Fixed setting: Open:7 bar; Close: 11 bar, with solder connection 6 mm ODM 1 ind. bulk noncorr. ind. Gold plated contacts; Fixed setting: Open:0,5 bar; Close: 1,25 bar P77AAW-9300 in bulk pack Gold plated contacts; Fixed setting: Open:7 bar; Close: 11 bar Gold plated contacts; Fixed setting: Open:22,5 bar; Close: 16 bar P77AAW-9350 in bulk pack
P77AAW-9301*
No
P77W
Yes
P77AAW-9354* P77AAW-9370* P77AAW-9700 P77AAW-9750 P77AAW-9800 P77AAW-9850 P77AAW-9851*
No Yes No
28
ind.
noncorr.
Yes
P77 Pressure Controls Manual Reset LP Selection Table ind. 5 non- P77BCA-9300 in bulk pack bulk corr. P77BCA-9300 with solder 30 ind. connection ODF 15 NH3 -0.5 to +7 1 ind. non5 corr. P77BCB -9300in bulk pack bulk 15 NH3 ind. non- P77BCB -9300 with solder 28 corr. connection 6mm ODM P77 Pressure Controls Manual Reset HP Selection Table ind. 5 non- P77BEA-9350 in bulk pack bulk corr. P77BEA-9350 with solder 3 to 30 3 30 ind. connection ODF 15 NH3 P77 Pressure Controls, TV-Begrenzer Selection Table ind. non5 corr. P77BEB-9350 in bulk pack bulk 3 to 30 3 15 NH3 ind. non- P77BEB-9350 with solder 28 corr. connection 6mm ODM P77 Pressure Controls, TV-Sicherheitsdruckbegrenzer Selection Table ind. non5 corr. P77BES-9350 in bulk pack bulk 3 to 30 3 15 ind. NH3 non- P77BES-9350 with solder 28 ind. corr. connection 6mm ODM * Quantity orders only For accessories, see Section Accessories
No
P77HR
No
P77B
Yes
P77B
Yes
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
43
Pressure Controls
Description The P78 series pressure controls may be used for control functions or limit functions, depending on model number. All models are provided with alarm contacts (except P78ALA). All standard models have phosphor bronze bellows and brass pressure connections. Models for use with ammonia are provided with stainless steel bellows and connectors. Devices conforming to DIN 32733 have a double bellows on the high pressure versions. Their IP54 classification means that these pressure controls are suitable for almost all applications. Features Generous wiring space Splash-proof enclosure (IP54) Trip-free manual reset Patented separate alarm contacts for both low pressure and high pressure cutout (except P78ALA) Application These dual pressure controls are designed for use in a variety of applications involving refrigeration high or low pressure. Models supplied have a whole range design, enabling them to be used with refrigerants R22, R134A, R404A and all other noncorrosive refrigerants which are within the operating range of the control. They may also be used for other high or low pressure applications such as air, water etc. Models which can be used with ammonia as well as controls tested, conforming to DIN 32733, and approved by TV are included in the program.
122
53
Style 5
80
22.5
Dimensions
Style 28
Style 30
A Line ~ max. 20 A
D
A
B D M C
A Line ~ ma x. 20 A
M C
Line ~ max. 20 A
B
HP
LP
HP
HP
B
HP HP
M1
M2
Range (bar) LP HP
Diff. (bar) LP
Style
W-sale Code
PED approval
P78L P78LCA-9300 bulk pack P78LCA-9300 solder connection ODF P78LCA-9300 with 90 cm capillary pressure connection
No
5 -0.5 to +7 3 to 30 0.5 to 3 1 28
bulk
noncorr.
ind.
Gold plated contacts P78LCW-9300 bulk pack P78LCW-9300 but set at 0 to 3 bar LP, 20 bar HP P78LCW-9300 solder connection 6 mm ODM P78LCW-9800 gold plated contacts, fixed settings LP 0,3 bar;HP22,5 bar
P78W
Yes
P78 Pressure Controls, Manual reset HP, Selection Table 5 ind. non- P78MCA-9300 bulk pack 5 bulk -0.5 to +7 3 to 30 0.5 to 3 1 corr. P78MCA-9300 solder 30 ind. connection ODF 15 ind. NH3 * Quantity orders only For accessories, see Section Accessories
P78M
No
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
44
Pressure Controls
P78 Pressure Controls, Manual reset LP/Auto. Reset HP Selection Table Range (bar) LP HP Diff. (bar) LP Wiring/ Action Style Pack. Refr. Additional Features W-sale Code Type-Model number P78PGA -9300 P78PGA 9320* P78PGA -9400 P78PGA -9700 P78PGB -9300 P78PGB -9800 PED approval
5 -0.5 to +7 3 to 30 1 30 15
noncorr. NH3
P78P
E
No
P78 Pressure Controls, Manual reset LP/HP Selection Table 5 ind. non-0.5 to +7 3 to 30 1 corr. P78PGB-9300 solder 28 ind connection 6 mm ODM P78 Pressure Controls, Manual reset HP, TV-Begrenzer Selection Table
Yes
-0.5 to +7
3 to 30
0.5 to 3
5 28
P78MCB-9300 HP factory set at 29 bar P78MCB-9300 bulk pack P78MCB-9300 solder connection 6 mm ODM
P78B
Yes
-0.5 to +7
3 to 30
0.5 to 3
5 28
ind.
noncorr.
P78S
Yes
P78 Pressure Controls, Manual reset HP/HP, TV-Begrenzer + Sicherheitsbegrenzer Selection Table Range (bar) HP HP Wiring/ Action Style Pack. Refr. Additional Features W-sale Code Type-Model number P78PLM -9350 P78PLM -9850 PED approval
3 to 30
3 to 30
5 28
ind.
noncorr.
P78BS
Yes
P78 Dual Fan Cycling Controls Selection Table Range (bar) HP HP Wiring/ Action Style Pack. Refr. Additional Features W-sale Code Type-Model number P78ALA -9351 P78ALA -9451 PED approval
3.5 to 21
3.5 to 21
5 30
ind.
noncorr.
P78A
No
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
45
Pressure Controls
L
12 22 50
22 12 22.5 10
P>
50 22
50
22
50
22.5
10
Description The P100 Series are encapsulated, nonadjustable, direct mount pressure controls typically used for low and high-pressure cutouts for OEM applications. The P100 series are produced according to switchpoint requirements of customers. The small dimensions, weight and protection class makes the P100 series applicable for use without the need of additional mounting brackets. The P100 Series can be used for all noncorrosive refrigerants like R134a; R22; R404, R410A and others. Features Compact size and light weight Encapsulated, dust tight switch IP67 Broad variety of electrical and pressure connections. Application Computer room air conditioning Refrigeration/ Air conditioning condensers Commercial refrigeration Ice machines Food service equipment
Connection
50 mm straight, 6mm dia. X 7 mm reduced end, copper clad brazing tube (TIF5) Electr.Termination
Close
Open
Type-Model Number
Switch
Normally Open
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,4 0,4 0,4 0,4 0,3 0,3 0,3 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,4 0,4 0,4 0,4 0,3 0,3 0,3 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,4 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
0,7 16 16 24 24 28 28 38 38 27,6 26 26
Normally Closed
2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. FAST ON 1,2 Mt. 3 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. FAST ON 2 Mt. 2 Mt.
SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST
P100AP-300D P100AP-301D P100AP-302D P100AP-303D P100AP-304D P100AP-305D P100AP-306D P100AP-307D P100AP-308D P100AP-309D P100AP-310D P100CP-102D P100CP-103D P100CP-104D P100CP-105D P100CP-106D P100CP-107D P100CP-108D P100CP-109D P100CP-110D P100CP-111D P100CP-112D
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
46
Pressure Controls
L L P> P>
16 24
34 29
16
37
11 24
16 21
11
O
M O
Description The P100 Series are encapsulated, nonadjustable, direct mount pressure controls typically used for low and high-pressure cutouts for OEM applications. The P100 series are produced according to switchpoint requirements of customers. The small dimensions, weight and protection class makes the P100 series applicable for use without the need of additional mounting brackets. The P100 Series can be used for all noncorrosive refrigerants like R134a; R22; R404, R410A and others. Features Compact size and light weight Encapsulated, dust tight switch IP67 Manual reset models have a trip-free design Models with gold-plated contacts available. Broad variety of electrical and pressure connections. Application Computer room air conditioning Refrigeration/ Air conditioning condensers Commercial refrigeration Ice machines Food service equipment
Connection
50 mm straight, 6mm dia. X 7 mm reduced end, copper clad brazing tube (TIF5) Electr.Termination
Close
Open
Type-Model Number
Switch
R134A R134A R407C R407C R404A R404A R410A R410A R407C R410A R410A
16 16 26 26 28 28 38 38 26 42 42
0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,7 1,0 1,0 0,7 0,7 0,7
X X X X X X X X X X X
2 Mt. 2 Mt. 3 Mt. 3 Mt. 3 Mt. 3 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt. 1,2 Mt. 2 Mt. 2 Mt.
SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST SPST
P100DA-66D P100DA-67D P100DA-68D P100DA-69D P100DA-70D P100DA-71D P100DA-72D P100DA-73D P100DA-74D P100DA-75D P100DA-76D
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
47
Pressure Controls
L 1 L 1 P> 3 2 M O O 3 M 2
16 32
38 31
50
90 27
P>
HP
Dimensions Wiring
LP
Connection
50 mm straight, 6mm dia. X 7 mm reduced end, copper clad brazing tube (TIF5) Electr.Termination
Close
Open
Type-Model Number
Switch
Normally Closed
16 16 24 24 28 28 38 38
11 11 18 18 21 21 28 28
X X X X X X X X
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
48
Pressure Controls
Accessories for Pressure Switches Selection Table Description Minimum order qty. Type-Model number BKT034N602R BKT275-1 210-25R WRN12-1 210-604R BKT182-2 BKT024N001R FTG013N001R FTG015N602R FTG015N603R GMT008N600R CNR003N001R CNR003N002R CNR012N001R CNR013N001R TBG16A-600 KIT023N600 KIT031N600 KIT034N600 271-51L NUT003N001R SEC002N600 SEC002N602 SEC002N603 SEC002N604 SEC002N606 SEC002N607 SEC002N608 SEC002N609 SEC002N610 SEC002N611 SEC002N612 SEC002N613 SEC002N615 SEC002N616 SEC002N617 SEC002N618 SEC002N619 SEC002N620 SEC002N621 SEC002N622 SEC002N623 SEC002N624 SEC002N625 SEC002N626 SEC002N627 SEC002N628 SEC002N629 SEC002N630 SEC002N631
Mounting bracket + screws for P35AC transducer Mounting bracket dual for P20 Mounting bracket for P20/P35 (single) Wrench P20/P21 Terminal cover P20/P21 Bracket for P32 L type, USA item Mounting bracket for P33 L type Test fitting for P33G Duct mounting kit staight Duct mounting kit bent Duct kit for P33, self locking grommet and tubing Connector 6 mm for P77/P78 Connector 8 mm for P77/P78 Adapter R3/8 female to 1/4-18 NPT male for P48 Adapter R 3/8 female to 1/4-18 NPT female for P48 Steam trap assembly P48 Locking kit for P48, P77/P78 - for field installation Valve depressors for conversion style 13-style 45a Seal rings for style 50/51 Mounting bracket for P28, P45, P48, P74, P77/P78 Flare nut Capillary kit, 90 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 13 - style 45a Capillary kit, 300 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 300 cm, style 13 - style 45a Capillary kit, 200 cm, style 13 - style 45a Capillary kit, 200 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 400 cm, style 13 - style 45a Capillary kit, 500 cm, style 13 - style 45a Capillary kit, 400 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 500 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 600 cm, 2x style 13 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 34 - style 45a Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 13 - style 34 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 13 - cap. Capillary kit, 100 cm, style 13 - style 13 Capillary kit, 100 cm, style 13 - style 34 Capillary kit, 200 cm, style 13 - style 34 Capillary kit, 200 cm, style 34 - style 34 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 34 - style 34 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 50 - style 50 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 51 - cap. Capillary kit, 200 cm, style 50 - style 50 Capillary kit, 300 cm, style 50 - style 50 Capillary kit, 90 cm, style 50 - style 51 Capillary kit, 200 cm, style 50 - style 51 Capillary kit, 300 cm, style 50 - style 51 Capillary kit, 400 cm, style 50 - style 51 Capillary kit, 500 cm, style 50 - style 51 Capillary kit, 50 cm, style 13 style 34
1 1 1 1 50 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 (1 box) 250 1 box) 50 500 100 100 100 100 75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 75 50 100 100 75 50 50 100
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
49
Pressure Controls
Replacement - Time relays P28 - P29 Timing (s) Voltage Switch action Type-Model number RLY13A603R RLY13A620R RLY13A998R RLY13A626R RLY13A627R RLY13A635R RLY13A644R
90 120 50 90 120 90 50
120/240 12 24
Manual reset, dual voltage (AC) Manual reset, 12V (AC/DC) Manual reset, 24V (AC/DC)
H735 Synthetic Flexible Hose Selection Table Pressure Connection Fitting connection
/4" metal tube with 7/16"-20 UNF swivel nut connection suitable for 1/4" SAE male flare.
Length (cm)
Aditional Features
Type-Model Number
Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Bulk packed Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Ind. Packed (2 pieces) Ind. Packed (2 pieces)
Straight x 90 elbow
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
50
C
Power Supply
A B
Com Hum Output
T E RH E
A B Bt
Com Hum Output Temp. Output
Series HT-9000
Power Supply
Wiring 0 10 V output
RH E
C
Power Supply
A
Com
B At Bt
Temp. Output Hum Output
RH E
Description The Johnson Controls humidity transmitter is based on a new "state of the art" humidity sensing element. It measures humidity over the entire range of 0 to 100% RH (non condensing) and has a wide operating temperature range. Its fast response, reliable long-term performance makes this transmitter well suited for refrigeration and HVAC installations. This range also includes models with an integrated temperature sensing element. It is recommended to use the humidity transmitter with Johnson Controls controllers such as the TC/SC/DC/DX-9100 series and System 27 Nova/MS series or with other systems having compatible input and output voltages. The basic principle of this humidity transmitter is a polymer capacitance type element in which capacitance changes proportionally to a change in humidity. The sensing element incorporates a protective coating which resists the effects of surface contamination. Features All models with electronic board for universal supply voltage Duct models with longer rod and with flange for duct insertion adjustment Senses over the entire range of 0 to 100%RH (non condensing) Transmitter can resist many hostile environments Temperature measurement option Polymer humidity sensing element is integrated onto a chip Duct and room enclosures are available
C
Po wer Supply
A B At Bt
Com Hum Output Tem p. Ou tput
At Bt
Wiring Pt100 output Series HT-9000 Electronic Humidity Transmitter Selection Table Humidity range Temperature range Enclosure IP30 Humidity Output Temperature Output Supply Voltage Type-Model Number HT-9000-URW HT-9001-URW HT-9002-URW HT-9003-URW HT-9005-URW HT-9006-URW HT-9009-URW HT-9000-UD1 HT-9001-UD1 HT-9002-UD1 HT-9003-UD1 HT-9005-UD1 HT-9006-UD1 HT-9009-UD1 HT-9000-UD2 HT-9001-UD2 HT-9002-UD2 HT-9003-UD2 HT-9005-UD2 HT-9006-UD2 HT-9009-UD2
0 to 100% RH
040C 060C 040C 060C 060C 060C 040C 060C 040C 060C 060C 060C 040C 060C 040C 060C 060C 060C
Room
0 to 10 VDC
010 VDC 010 VDC NTC K2 Pt100 Pt1000 A99 010 VDC 010 VDC NTC K2 Pt100 Pt1000 A99 010 VDC 010 VDC NTC K2 Pt100 Pt1000 A99
12 to 30 VDC 24 VAC 15 %
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
51
Humidity Controls
71 49
3
% H 2O >
Dimensions
Wiring
Description The sensing element consists of carefully selected and processed human hair, proven to be the most sensitive and stable material known for this application. Under normal conditions these controls retain their sensitivity and accuracy for many years. Features Wide range 0 to 90% R.H. Dust tight Penn switch. SPDT Contacts. Use of human hair. Field adjustable high and low limit stops. Separate mounting plate. Application These room humidistats are designed to control humidification or dehumidification equipment. It provides SPDT control. Type-Model Number W43C -9100
133
W43 Humidity Controls Selection Table Range (%RH) Differential Aditional Features (%RH)
090
Knob adjustment
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
52
Detectors and Monitoring Units for detection and alarm signaling of refrigerant leakage.
Dimensions GD
Dimensions GS
A monitoring unit. The monitoring unit shows the status of one or more remote detectors. A wall mount or a DIN rail mount model is available.
Features Two alarm thresholds No on-site calibration necessary Semi-conductive sensing element Alarm memory on detector Selectable auto reset or manual reset mode on monitoring unit Up to 10 detectors can be connected to one monitoring unit
Leak Detection System Leah Detectors Selection Table Supply voltage Output relays Enclosure
Dimensions GR Refrigerant Type-Model Number GD2.0-CFC GD2.0-HFC GD2.0NH3 GS2.0-CFC GS2.0-HFC GS2.0NH3 GR2.0-CFC GR2.0-HFC GR2.0NH3
Room
12 VAC/DC
24 V
Splashproof
Savety Valves
CFC/HCFC universal HFC universal Ammonia CFC/HCFC universal HFC universal Ammonia CFC/HCFC universal HFC universal Ammonia
118
12 43 53 70
Dimensions G27C Monitors Selection Table Supply voltage Output relays Enclosure
45 83
Dimensions G230C
Refrigerant
12 V ac/dc 230 V ac or 12 V dc
24 V 230 V
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
53
V46 Angled
Dimensions
Valve size 3 /8 1 /2 3 /4
C 66 86 95
D 43 51 55
E 18 27 36
F 89 100 110
Description These pressure actuated modulating valves control the quantity of water to a condenser by directly sensing pressure changes in a refrigerant circuit. The valves can be used in non-corrosive refrigerant systems. Ammonia power elements and valves designed for saltwater applications are available. The valves have a quick opening characteristic and open on pressure increase (direct acting). Reverse acting (close on pressure increase) is possible Features Pressure balanced valve design High refrigerant pressure resistant bellows Pressure actuated 3/8, 1/2, 3/4" are angled body type valves with high Kv value 3/8" up to 2" pressure valves "all range" types Quick opening valve characteristics No close fitting or sliding parts in water passages Easy to disassemble. All parts can be replaced Special bronze bodies and monel parts Power elements with stainless steel bellows available Wide range of pressure connection styles Nickel plated seats available for 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4" valves Direct/reverse action
V64 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size thread according to ISO 228 Style Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Length It ordering KIT031N600 Type-Model number V46AA -9600 V46AA -9608* V46AA 9610 V46AA -9620* V46AA -9602* V46AA 9950 V46AA -9951* V46AB 9600 V46AB 9950 V46AC 9600 V46AC 9606 V46AC 9951 V46AA 9300 V46AA 9301* V46AA 9606 V46AA -9609* V46AA 9510 V46AA 9511* V46AB 9300 V46AB 9605 V46AB -9951 V46AB -9510 V46AC -9300 V46AC -9605 V46AC -9502 V46AC -9510
13
3
75
518
Angled
1
/2 /4
13 34 13 34 5
With special washer to prevent waterhammer at low flow capacity With special washer to prevent waterhammer at low flow capacity/nickel plated seat bulkpack version V46AA-9600 Nickel plated seat/longer capillary Nickel plated seat/ solder connection .040" i.d.cap./solder connection solder connection/ "062" id.cap longer capillary solder connection Nickel plated seat, high range. With washer to prevent waterhammer at low flow capacity Nickel plated seat, high range Nickel plated seat, high range. With washer to prevent waterhammer at low flow capacity High range Nickel plated seat, high range. With washer to prevent waterhammer at low flow capacity nickel plated seat, high range solder connection,high range High range
/8
13 50 51 5 13 34 50 5 13 50
523
Angled
1
/2
75 nickel plated seat, high range 140 longer cap. 75 High range For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
3
/4
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
54
D 72 72
E 50 58
F 13 13
V46 Straight
Dimensions
V46 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size Thread acc. to ISO 7-Rc on inand outlet Style Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Length It ordering KIT031N600 Type-Model number V46AD -9300 V46AD -9510 V46AD -9600 V46AE -9300 V46AE -9510 V46AE -9600 V46AE -9950
5 50 13 5 50 13 34 15 50
75 75 75 130 75 150
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
55
D C
Dimensions in mm A B C 137 244 144 168 304 164 172 304 164
D 18 20 20
F 47 57 70
G 67 90 90
H 13 18 18
J 18 18 18
V46 Flanged
Dimensions
V46 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size DIN 2533 flange connections Style Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Type-Model Length It number ordering KIT031N600
11/2
5 13 15 5 15
2 /2
5 15
75 -
V46AT -9700
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
56
Valve size 3 /8 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 1 /4
Dimensions in mm A B C 68 161 80 79 165 86 86 175 96 124 246 139 124 254 144
D 42 52 55 71 71
E 32 29 35 39 48
F 10 10 10 13 13
V46 Straight
Dimensions
V46 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size acc. to ISO 228-G
3 1
Style
Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Length It ordering KIT031N600
/8 /2 /4 13 75 120 75 120 50 75 120 75 50 140 75 150 Longer capillary Longer capillary Longer capillary Longer capillary Longer capillary
V46BB -9600 V46BC -9600 V46BC -9601 V46BD -9600 V46BD -9601 V46BE -9510 V46BE -9600 V46BE -9601 V46BA -9510 V46BB -9510 V46BC -9510 V46BC -9511 V46BD -9510 V46BE -9511
518
Straight
1 1/4
3 1
13
/8 /2 /4
5 23
1023
1 1 1/4
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
57
D C
Dimensions in mm A B C 135 244 144 162 304 164 172 304 164
D 14 16 16
F 47 57 70
G 67 90 90
H 13 18 18
J 18 18 18
V46 Flanged
Dimensions
V46 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size DIN 86021 flange connection s Style Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Length It ordering KIT031N600 Type-Model number V46BR -9510 V46BR -9600 V46BS -9300 V46BS -9301
11/2 2
50 13
75
5 21/2 15
Ammonia
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
58
50
51
Dimensions
19
23.8
109
V46SA Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size Thread acc. to ISO 228-G on in- and outlet Style Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style 45A by Type-Model Length It number ordering KIT031N600
75 75
Capillary soldered to power element Capillary separate Capillary separate, nickel plated seat
V46SA -9101 V46SA -9110 V46SA -9111 V46SA -9300 V46SA -9600 V46SA -9950 V46SA -9951
/8
5 13 34
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
59
Description These modulating water valves can be used for heating applications. It does have an heating element which means that the bulb temperature always must be higher than the valve body (power element). The valve opens at increasing bulb temperature. The bulb must be mounted pointing downwards up to horizontal.
E
Dimensions
D 43 51 55
E 18 27 36
F 89 100 110
Features Pressure balanced valve design 3/8, 1/2, 3/4" are angled body type valves with high Kv value Quick opening valve characteristics No close fitting or sliding parts in water passages Easy to disassemble. All parts can be replaced Special bronze bodies
I
Type-Model number V47AA -9160 V47AA -9161
V47 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size according to ISO 228-G
3 1
Capillary Length
/8 1.8 m plain 82
/2 1 /2
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
60
D 72 72
E 50 58
F 13 13
V47 Straight
Dimensions
V47 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size acc. to ISO 7-Rc Capillary Length Bulb Style 4 Additional Features Length mm Type-Model number V47AD -9160
1 straight 11/4
1.8 m arm.
152
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
61
D C
Valve size
F
Dimensions in mm A B C
11/2 2 21/2
18 20 20
47 57 70
67 90 90
13 18 18
18 18 18
V47 Flanged
Dimensions
V47 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size DIN 2533 flange connections Capillary Length Bulb Style 4 Additional Features Length mm Type-Model number V47AR -9160 V47AR -9161 V47AS -9160 V47AS -9161 V47AT -9160 V47AT -9161
152
254
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
62
D 52 55 71 71
E 29 35 52 62
F 10 10 13 13
V47 Straight
Dimensions
V47 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size acc. to ISO 228-G
1 3
Capillary Length
Type-Model number V47BB -9161 V47BC -9160 V47BC -9161 V47BD -9160 V47BD -9161 V47BE -9160
/2 /4 1.8 m
152 82
straight 1 1 /4
1
1.8 m arm.
152
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
63
D C
D 14 16
E 150 165
F 47 57
G 67 90
H 13 18
I 110 125
J 18 18
V47 Flanged
Dimensions
V47 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size DIN 86021 flange connections Capillary Length Bulb Style 4 Additional Features Length mm Type-Model number V47BR -9150 V47BR -9160 V47BS -9161
straight
11/2 2
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
64
H Port 1 Port 2 C E D A
P ort 3
Plu gge d
V48 Commercial Type Valve Dimensions in mm size A B C 1 /2 192 91 19 3 /4 208 100 23 1 287 142 25 296 141 31 11/4 Sea-water Type 3 /4 203 97 22
Dimensions
D 41 45 51 61
E 30 36 50 58
F 8 8 8 8
G 82 88 124 127
H 52 56 71 71
I 48 52 67 67
J 52 56 72 71
45
35
95
55
52
55
Description These watervalves are especially designed for condensing units cooled either by atmospheric or forced draft cooling towers. They may be used on single, or multiple condenser hookups to the tower. The type V48 valve senses the compressor head pressure and allows cooling water to flow to the condenser, to bypass the condenser, or to allow waterflow to both condenser and by-pass line in order to maintain correct refrigerant head pressure. A further advantage of this system is that the 3way valve permits a continuous water flow to the tower so the tower can operate efficiently with a minimum of maintenance on nozzles and wetting surfaces. The valves can be used in non-corrosive refrigerant systems. Ammonia power elements and valves designed for saltwater applications are available. The valves have a quick opening characteristic. Features Pressure balanced design Free movement of all parts Easy manual flushing High K v values Pressure actuated Can be used as mixing or diverting valve
V48 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size acc. to ISO 228-G
1
Style
Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style Length It 45A by ordering KIT031N600
Type-Model number V48AB -9510 V48AB -9600 V48AB -9601 V48AC -9510 V48AC -9600 V48AC -9601
50 /2 13 50
3
straight /4
75
13
acc. to ISO 7-Rc 620 416 1.57.5 416 620 416 1.57.5 Maritime types 416 50 1 straight 50 11/4 acc. to ISO 228-G straight
3
13
/4
13
75
Seawater resistant
V48BC -9600
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
65
Po rt 3
360
Port 1 Port 2
157 187 154
95
V48 V48 Pressure Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range (bar) Body Style Size acc. to ISO 7-Rc Style
126
Dimensions
I
Type-Model number V48AF -9300
Features Capillary Additional is possible to change Style13 into Style Length It 45A by ordering KIT031N600
614 1.59
straight
11/2
V48AF -9301
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
66
H P ort1 P ort2
P ort3
Plu gge d
V49 Valve size 1 /2 3 /4 11/4 Dimensions in mm A B C 192 91 19 208 100 23 296 141 31
Dimensions
Description These modulating water valves can be used for heating applications. It does have an heating element which means that the bulb temperature always must be higher than the valve body (power element). The valve opens at increasing bulb temperature. The bulb must be mounted pointing downwards up to horizontal. Features Pressure balanced design Free movement of all parts Easy manual flushing High K v values Can be used as mixing or diverting valve
D 41 45 61
E 30 36 58
F 8 8 8
G 82 88 121
H 52 56 71
I 48 52 67
J 52 56 71
V49 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size ISO 228-G Thread
1
Capillary Length
straight
3
/2
1.8 m plain
82
2457 530
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
67
Port 3
360
Port 1 Port 2
157 187 154
95
V49
126
Dimensions
V49 Temperature Actuated Water Valve Selection Table Range C Body Style Size ISO 7-Rc Thread Capillary Length Bulb Style 4 Additional Features Length mm Type-Model number V49AF -9160
2446 530
straight
1 1/2
1.8 m arm.
254
V49AF -9163
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
Accessories
Max. press. 17 bar, Temp.120C, USA item (element 17,5x152 mm) Max. press. 17 bar, Temp.120C, USA item (element 17,5x254 mm) Max. press. 69 bar, Temp. 370C USA item (element 17,5x254 mm) Max. press. 69 bar, Temp. 370C USA item (element 17,5x82 mm) Max. press. 10 bar, Temp. 120C USA item (element 17,5x82 mm)
19.4 x 214 Steel/Copper 19.4 x 265 V47/V49 19.1 x 255 19.6 x 89 19.6 X 89 Steel/Brass Tin 1/2 - 14 Monel/Monel Tin
For replacement parts, see Section Replacement Parts * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
68
Accessories (continued)
For V46AA - V47AA For V46AB - V47AB For V46AC - V47AC For V46AD - V47AD For V46AE - V47AE - V46AR - V47AR For V46AS - V47AS For V46AT - V47AT For V46BA For V46BB - V47BB For V46BC - V47BC For V46BD - V47BD For V46BE - V47BE - V46BR - V47BR For V46BS - V47BS - V46BT - V47BT For V48AB - V49AB For V48AC - V49AC For V48AD For V48AE - V49AE For V48AF - V49AF For V48BC
Replacement parts - Watervalves / Diaphragm kits for watervalves
100 pcs for V46AA/V47AA and V46BA 100 pcs for V46AB/V47AB/V48AB/V49AB and V46BB/V47BB 100 pcs for V46AC/V47AC/V48AC/V49AC and V46BC/V47BC/V48BC 50 pcs for V46AD/V47AD/V48AD, V46AE/V47AE/V48AE/V49AE, V46AR/V47AR, V46BD/V47BD, V46BE/V47BE and V46BR/V47BR 25 pcs for V46AS/V47AS, V48AF/V49AF, V46AT/V47AT, V46BS/V47BS and V46BT/V47BT
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
69
Accessories (continued)
For For For For For For For For For For For For For For For
V46AA-9300 V46AB-9300 V46AC-9300 V46AD-9300 V46AA-9600/9606 V46AB-9600/9605/9606 V48AB-9600/9601 V46AC-9600/9605 V48AC-9600/9601 V46AD-9600 V46AE-9600 V46AR-9600 V48AD-9600/9601 V48AE-9600/9601 V46AS-9300 V46AS-9301 V46AT-9301 V46BA-9600 V46BB-9600 V46BC-9600 V48BC-9600 V46BD-9600 V46BE-9600 V46BR-9600 V48AD-9101 V48AE-9101 V48AC-9101
Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 5 - range 5/11,5 bar Style 5 - range 11/18 bar Style 5 - range 11/18 bar Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 13 - 0,75 m capillary Style 46A - special Liebert Style 46A - special Liebert Style 46A - special Liebert
I
246-671R 246-758R 246-821R 246-824R 246-825R 246-925R
SEP025N601R SEP026N601R SET98A632R SET98A636R SET98A617R SET98A640R SET98A624R SET98A641R SET29A648R SET29A629R SET29A662R SET29A632R SET29A605R 246-667R 246-781R
V47AA-9160 V47AA-9161 V47AB-9160/V49AB-9160/V49AB-9163 V47AB-9161/V47BB-9161 V47AC-9160/V47BC-9160/V49AC-9162 V47AC-9161/V47BC-9161 V47AD-9160/V47AE-9160/V47AR-9160/V49AE-9160 V47BD-9160/V47BE-9160/V47BR-9160 V47AD-9161/V47AE-9161/V47AR-9161/V49AE-9161 V47BD-9161 V47AS-9160/V47AT-9160/V49AF-9160/V49AF-9163 V47BS-9160/V47BT-9160 V47AS-9161/V47AT-9161 V47BS-9161 V47BR-9150 V46AD/AE/AR/BD/BE/BR, V48AD/AE V46AS/AT/BS/BT, V48AF
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
70
VA-7010
VA-7040 Dimensions
VA-7450
Description VG4000 Series High Capacity / High Close-off Zone Valves are primarily designed to regulate the flow of water in response to the demand of a controller in zone, fan coil, and Variable Air Volume (VAV) reheat coil applications. The valves can be used in combination with VA7010 electric on/off actuators, VA-7040 thermal actuators and VA-7450 incremental or proportional actuators. VG4000 Series Valves are available in Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), or three-way mixing configurations. Features Cast Bronze Body and Stainless Steel Stem and Spring EPT Rubber Plug for Bubble-Tight Shutoff Easy, Field-Replaceable Packing Actuator Can Be Field Installed After Piping Built-In Return Spring for VA-7010 Actuators Selectable flow characteristic in combination with VA-7452 actuators
C1
C2
C1
C2
Sweat Connection VG4000 Series High Capacity / High Close-off Zone Valves Selection Table Threaded Female Connection Body Type Body Size Connection Size Close-Off Kvs Pressure (kPa) Dimensions (mm) A B C1
(VA-7010)
C3
C3
J
Type-Model Number C3
(VA-7450)
C2
(VA-7040)
VG42y0FC
19 111 32
Threads
VG42y0GC VG44y0FC
110
105
15 19 15 19 29 39
111
94 97 94 97 94 97
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
71
VG5000 Forged Brass 2-Way and Mixing Valves for Hot and Cold Water for HVAC Systems
C1
C2
C3
return
A VA-7010 + VG52...
A VA-7040 + VG54...
supply
VG5000 3-way mixing with VA-7450 (left) VG5000 2-way valve with VA-7010 (right)
Connection Size
VG5000 Male Thread Connection Valve Selection Table Factory Set Kvs and alternative A Body adjustable Kvs Type z =1 z =9 1 2 3
Dimensions (mm) F Type-Model Number VG52z0AC VG52z0BC VG52z0CC VG52z0DC VG52z0EC VG52z0JC VG52z0KC VG54z0AC VG54z0BC VG54z0CC VG54z0DC VG54z0EC VG54z0JC VG54z0KC VG58z0AC VG58z0BC VG58z0CC VG58z0DC VG58z0EC VG58z0JC VG58z0KC
0.4 0.4 1 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 0.4 0.4 1 1 1.6 3.5 3.5
0.25 0.25 0.63 0.63 0.25 0.25 0.63 0.63 1 2.5 2.5 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3,5
200 200 200 200 100 140 100 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 100 100 100
68 68 68 68 72 74 74 68 68 68 68 72 74 74 68 68 68 68 72 74 74
96 96 96 96 98 98 98
95 95 95 95 97 97 97 95 95 95 95 97 97 97 95 95 95 95 97 97 97
90 90 90 90 92 92 92 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 90 90 90 90 92 92 92
11 11 11 11 13.5 15 15 11 11 11 11 13.5 15 15 11 11 11 11 15 15
96 96 96 96 98 98 98
96 96 96 96 98 98 98
Threads
- 13.5
BSP parallel z =1 Compression fitting (only for Bodies with connection size ) z = 9
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
72
VG5000 Forged Brass 2-Way and Mixing Valves for Hot and Cold Water for HVAC Systems (continued)
Body Type
Factory Set Kvs (Kv on bypass port of 3-way mixing + built-in bypass valves)
Type-Model Number
0.25 (0.25) 0.4 (0.25) 0.4 (0.4) 0.63 (0.4) 0.63 (0.63) 1 (0.63) 1.0 (1.0) 1.6 (1.0) 1.6 (1.6) 2.5 (1.6) 2.5 (2.5) 3.0 (2.5) 3.0 (3.0)
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
68 68 68 68 68 68 68 72 72 74 74 74 74
96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 98 98 98 98
95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 97 97 97 97
Threads
90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 92
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 13.5 13.5 15 15 15 15
VG55z0AC VG55z0PC VG55z0BC VG55z0QC VG55z0CC VG55z0RC VG55z0DC VG55z0SC VG55z0EC VG55z0TC VG55z0JC VG55z0UC VG55z0KC
BSP parallel z =1 Compression fitting (only for Bodies with connection size ) z = 9
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
73
VG5000 Forged Brass 2-Way and Mixing Valves for Hot and Cold Water for HVAC Systems (continued)
C1
C2
C3
A VA-7010
A VA-7040
A VA-7450
Connection Size
Body Type
Dimensions (mm) A B C1 (VA-7010) C2 (VA-7040) C3 (VA-7450) Type-Model Number VG52y0AC VG52y0BC VG52y0CC VG52y0DC VG52y0EC VG52y0JC VG52y0KC VG52y0MC VG54y0AC VG54y0BC VG54y0CC VG54y0DC VG54y0EC VG54y0JC VG54y0KC VG54y0MC VG58y0CC VG58y0DC VG58y0EC VG58y0JC VG58y0KC VG58y0MC
0.25 0.25 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.5 3.5 5.5 0.25 0.25 1.6 1.6 1.6 3.5 3.5 5.5
0.4 0.4 1 1 1 0.4 0.4 1 1 1 2.5 2.5 4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 5.5 0.63 0.63 0.63 1.6 1.6 2.5 0.63 0.63 0.63 -
200 200 200 200 200 140 100 62 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 62 200 200 200 100 100 62
55 55 55 55 55 66 66 90 55 55 55 55 55 66 66 90 55 55 55 66 66 90
100 100 100 100 100 103 103 106 100 100 100 100 100 103 103 106 100 100 100 103 103 106
y = 0: y = 2: y = 4:
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
74
VG5000 Forged Brass 2-Way and Mixing Valves for Hot and Cold Water for HVAC Systems (continued)
C1
C2
C3 B D
A VA-7010
A VA-7040
A VA-7450
Sweat Connection
Connection Size Close-Off Pressure (kPa)
Body Type
0.25 0.25 1 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 4 5.5 0.25 0.25 1.45 1.45 1.45 3.2 3.2 5
0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 0.4 0.4 1 1 1 2.5 2.5 4 1.45 3.2 5 0.63 0.63 0.63 1.6 1.6 2.5 0.4 0.4 0.63 -
200 200 300 300 200 140 100 85 62 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 62 200 100 62
61 61 61 61 61 78 78 95 95 61 61 61 61 61 78 78 95 61 78 95
100 100 100 100 100 103 103 106 106 100 100 100 100 100 103 103 106 100 103 106
15.98 VG5270AC 15.98 VG5270BC 15.98 VG5270CC 15.98 VG5270DC 15.98 VG5270EC 22.3 VG5270JC 22.3 VG5270KC 28.7 VG5270LC 28.7 VG5270MC 15.98 VG5470AC 15.98 VG5470BC 15.98 VG5470CC 15.98 VG5470DC 15.98 VG5470EC 22.3 VG5470JC 22.3 VG5470KC 28.7 VG5470MC 15.98 VG5870EC 22.3 VG5870KC 28.7 VG5870MC
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
75
VG7000 Series Female Threaded Bronze 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water or low pressure steam, fluid temp. limits: 2 140 C with brass trim, 2 170 C with stainless steel trim.
Dimensions
Valve Size DN
A 2-way PDTC
21 24 29 34 55 53
39 41 44 51 70 72
46 54 65 70 85 95
Dimensions in mm VG7000 Series 2-way PDTC (normally open) Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN (connection size) Kvs Valve Stroke VA-731x* 150 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim VA-715x/VA-77xx 500 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim VA-720x 1000 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim VG72yxAT VG72yxBT Type-Model Number * X=1 X=3
15
20 25 32 40 50
1600 1600 8 mm 700 1600 1490 950 595 360 235 145 930 595 370 230 145 90 1220 770 470 300 190
Threads
VG72yxCT
1600
VG72yxDT VG72yxET VG72yxFT VG72yxGT VG72yxLT VG72yxNT VG72yxPT VG72yxRT VG72yxST Trim % equal
400 250 13 mm 19 mm
BSP parallel y = 0: x=1 BSP taper y = 2: x=3 y = 4: NPT When T (threaded stem) is replaced by S the valve is supplied with a slotted stem and small bonnet for VA-7310 electric, Fluid temp. limit in conjunction with VA-7310 = 120 C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
76
VG7000 Series Female Threaded Bronze 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water or low pressure steam, fluid temp. limits: 2 140 C with brass trim, 2 170 C with stainless steel trim. (continued)
15
20 25 32 40 50
1600
1600 1600 1490 950 595 360 235 145 930 595 370 230 145 90 1600 1220
8 mm
700
400 250 13 mm 19 mm
Threads Trim % equal BSP parallel y = 0: x = 1 Brass BSP taper y = 2: x = 3 St. Steel NPT y = 4: When T (threaded stem) is replaced by S the valve is supplied with a slotted stem and small bonnet for VA-7310 electric, Fluid temp. limit in conjunction with VA-7310 = 120 C
VG7000 Series 3-way Mixing Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN (connection size) Kvs Valve Stroke VA-731x 150 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim VA-715x/VA-77xx 500 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim VA-720x 1000 N Brass Trim St. Steel Trim Type-Model Number * X=2 VG78yxAT VG78yxBT X=4
15
20 25 32 40 50
1600
1600 1600 1490 950 595 360 235 145 930 595 370 230 145 90 1600 1220
8 mm
700
400 250 13 mm 19 mm
BSP parallel y = 0: x=2 BSP taper y = 2: x=4 NPT y = 4: When T (threaded stem) is replaced by S the valve is supplied with a slotted stem and small bonnet for VA-7310 electric, Fluid temp. limit in conjunction with VA-7310 = 120 C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
77
VG8000H Flanged 2 and 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN25 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C** (-20 C when optional glycerine cup is used. 280 C when cooling fin is used)
Dimensions
Flange Dimensions
Bolts M12 x 45 M12 x 50 M12 x 50 M16 x 55 M16 x 55 M16 x 60 Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 DN 65 80 100 125 150 D1 185 200 235 270 300 D2 145 160 190 220 250 D3 122 138 162 188 218
DN 15-150
VG8000H Series Flanged 2-way PDTC Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8126 1200 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Kvs
15
20 25 32 40
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model * Number
2500 2500 13 mm 2030 1360 660 370 1930 1180 1300 770 2400 1480 2500 2500 -
VG82A6S1H VG82A5S1H VG82A4S1H VG82A3S1H VG82A2S1H VG82A1S1H VG82B2S1H VG82B1S1H VG82C2S1H VG82C1S1H VG82D2S1H VG82D1S1H VG82E2S1H VG82E1S1H
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
78
DN 15-150
VG8000H Series Flanged 2-way PDTC Valves Selection Table (continued) Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8226 1700 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Kvs
50 40 65 63 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 350 Glycerine cup available only by special order.
DN 15-150
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model * Number
180 100 50
VG8000H Series Flanged 3-way Mixing Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8126 1200 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Kvs
0.4 0.63 1.0 15 2500 1.6 2.5 2500 4.0 4.0 20 13 mm 2030 6.3 6.3 25 1360 10 10 32 660 1930 16 16 40 370 1180 25 50 40 65 63 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 350 Glycerine cup available only by special order.
DN 15-150
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model * Number
2500 -
2500 -
1300 770 650 500 220 1300 1010 480 290 170 100 600 450 200 100 -
2400 1480 920 710 330 180 100 50 720 450 270
VG88A6S1H VG88A5S1H VG88A4S1H VG88A3S1H VG88A2S1H VG88A1S1H VG88B2S1H VG88B1S1H VG88C2S1H VG88C1S1H VG88D2S1H VG88D1S1H VG88E2S1H VG88E1S1H VG88F1S1H VG88G1S1H VG88H1S1H VG88J1S1H VG88K1S1H VG88L1S1H
VG8000H Series Flanged 3-way Diverting Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8126 1200 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Kvs
15
20
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model * Number
2030
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
79
DN 15-150
VG8000H Series Flanged 3-way Diverting Valves Selection Table (continued) Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8126 1200 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Kvs
6.3 1360 10 10 32 660 1930 16 16 40 370 1180 25 50 40 65 63 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 350 * Glycerine cup available only by special order. 25
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model * Number
1300 770 650 500 220 1300 1010 480 290 170 100 600 450 200 100 -
2400 1480 920 710 330 180 100 50 720 450 270
VG89C2S1H VG89C1S1H VG89D2S1H VG89D1S1H VG89E2S1H VG89E1S1H VG89F1S1H VG89G1S1H VG89H1S1H VG89J1S1H VG89K1S1H VG89L1S1H
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
80
VG8000N Flanged 2 and 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN16 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 180 C** (-10 C when optional glycerine cup is used)
Dimensions
Flange Dimensions
Bolts Holes DN D1 D2 D3
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80
100 106 106 123 140 145 156 180 225 255 290
15 20 25 32 40 50
95 105 115
65 75 85
45 58 68 78 88 102
4 4 4 4 4 4
65 80
185 200
4 8 8 8 8
DN 15-40
VG8000N Series Flanged 2-way PDTO (normally closed) Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN (connection Kvs Nominal VA-7200 RA-3000-712x FA-1000 FA-2000-711x Stroke size) 1000 N 1600 N 700 N 2000 N 0.4 0.63 1.0 15 1600 1600 1.6 1600 2.5 13 mm 4.0 6.3 25 1570 1270 10 1600 16 40 440 1250* 340 25
Type-Model * Number VG84A6S1N VG84A5S1N VG84A4S1N VG84A3S1N VG84A2S1N VG84A1S1N VG84C2S1N VG84C1S1N VG84E2S1N VG84E1S1N
* Glycerine cup available only by special order. ** (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
81
VG8000N Flanged 2 and 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN16 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 180 C** (-10 C when optional glycerine cup is used) continued.
Kvs
0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 15 0.63 1.0 1600 1.6 2.5 1600 4.0 13 mm 4.0 20 6.3 6.3 25 1570 10 10 32 770 16 16 40 440 1250* 25 50 40 700 1350 65 63 25 540 1050 80 100 240 500 100 160 310 125 250 42 190 150 350 110 ** (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752) * Glycerine cup available only by special order.
VA-7200 1000 N
FA-3300 6000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Type-Model * Number
1600 -
1270 -
610 340
1600
VG82A9S1N VG82A8S1N VG82A7S1N VG82A6S1N VG82A5S1N VG82A4S1N VG82A3S1N VG82A2S1N VG82A1S1N VG82B2S1N VG82B1S1N VG82C2S1N VG82C1S1N VG82D2S1N VG82D1S1N VG82E2S1N VG82E1S1N VG82F1S1N VG82G1S1N VG82H1S1N VG82J1S1N VG82K1S1N VG82L1S1N
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
82
VG8000N Flanged 3-way DN 15 DN 150. Nodular Iron PN16 Valve for water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam. Fluid temp. limits +2 180 C** (-10 C when optional glycerine cup is used)
Kvs
15
0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.3 6.3 10 10 16 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 350
VA-7200 1000 N
FA-3300 6000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Type-Model * Number
1600 1600 1600 13 mm 1570 770 440 25 42 1250* 700 540 240 1350 1050 500 310 190 110 610 340 1030 790 370 190 110 50 740 460 280 1600 1270 -
VG88A6S1N VG88A5S1N VG88A4S1N VG88A3S1N VG88A2S1N VG88A1S1N VG88B2S1N VG88B1S1N VG88C2S1N VG88C1S1N VG88D2S1N VG88D1S1N VG88E2S1N VG88E1S1N VG88F1S1N VG88G1S1N VG88H1S1N VG88J1S1N VG88K1S1N VG88L1S1N VG89A6S1N VG89A5S1N VG89A4S1N VG89A3S1N VG89A2S1N VG89A1S1N VG89B2S1N VG89B1S1N VG89C2S1N VG89C1S1N VG89D2S1N VG89D1S1N VG89E2S1N VG89E1S1N VG89F1S1N VG89G1S1N VG89H1S1N VG89J1S1N VG89K1S1N VG89L1S1N
15
20 25 32 40
50 65 80 100 125 150 ** (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752) * Glycerine cup available only by special order.
VG8000N Series Flanged 3-way Diverting Valves Selection Table 0.4 0.63 1.0 1600 1.6 1600 2.5 4.0 1600 4.0 13 mm 6.3 1270 6.3 1570 10 10 770 610 1600 16 16 440 1250* 340 25 40 700 1350 63 25 540 1050 100 240 500 160 310 250 42 190 350 110
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
83
VG8000V Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50%) DN 15 - DN 150 Nodular Iron PN 16. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C *
Dimensions
Flange Dimensions
Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 DN 65 80 100 125 150 D1 185 200 220 250 285 D2 145 160 180 210 240 D3 122 138 158 188 212
DN 15-150
VG8000V Series Flanged 2-way PDTC (normally open) Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N
Kvs
2.5 4.0 1600 1600 20 6.3 13 25 10 1570 32 16 770 1250 40 25 440 50 40 65 63 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 350 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752) 15
VA-7200 1000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
FA-3300-741x 6000 N
Type-Model Number
VG82A2V1N VG82A1V1N VG82B1V1N VG82C1V1N VG82D1V1N VG82E1V1N VG82F1V1N VG82G1V1N VG82H1V1N VG82J1V1N VG82K1V1N VG82L1V1N
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
84
VG8000V Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50%) DN 15 - DN 150 Nodular Iron PN 16. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C * (continued)
Kvs
2.5 4.0 1600 1600 20 6.3 13 25 10 1570 32 16 770 1250 40 25 440 50 40 65 63 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 350 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752) 15
VA-7200 1000 N
FA-3300 6000 N
DN (connection size)
Nominal Stroke
RA-3000-732x 3000 N
Type-Model Number
VG88A2V1N VG88A1V1N VG88B1V1N VG88C1V1N VG88D1V1N VG88E1V1N VG88F1V1N VG88G1V1N VG88H1V1N VG88J1V1N VG88K1V1N VG88L1V1N
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
85
VG8300N & H Series Flanged 2-Way PDTC for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50%) DN 40 - DN 150 Balanced Pressure Nodular Iron PN 16 & PN 25. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C *
Dimensions
Flange Dimensions
Holes DN D1 D2 D3 d
130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480
15 20 25 32 40 50
95 105 115
65 75 85
45 58 68 78 88
4 4 4 4 4 4
185 145 200 160 220 180 250 210 285 240
4 8 8 8 8
102 17.5
DN 15-150
VG8000N & H Series 2-way Balanced Pressure Valve, PDTC (normally open), PN 16, Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa Type-Model Number Non Spring Return Spring Return
RA-3000-712x 1600 N RA-3000-722x 1800 N RA-3000-732x 3000 N RA-3100-8226 1700 N FA-2000-711x 2000 N FA-2000-751x 2400 N
40 25 13 1600 1600 1600 50 40 65 63 25 1600 80 100 100 160 160 125 250 42 0 150 350 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
VA-7200 1000 N
Kvs
1600 -
1600
FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Nominal Stroke
RA-3100-8126 1200 N
DN (connection size)
1600 1600
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
86
VG8300N & H Series Flanged 2-Way PDTC for water and Glycol solutions (max. 50%) DN 40 - DN 150 Balanced Pressure Nodular Iron PN 16 & PN 25. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C *
40 25 13 2500 2500 2500 50 40 65 63 25 2500 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 2500 150 350 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
VA-7200 1000 N
Kvs
2500 -
2500
FA-2000-741x 2200 N
Nominal Stroke
RA-3100-8126 1200 N
DN (connection size)
2500 2500
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
87
VG9000 Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 30%), DN 20 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 & PN 10. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C
DN D3 D2 D1
VG9000 Series Valves with VA-7150, VA-7200 (front / right) and RA-3000 (rear) Electric Actuators
Dimensions
Dimensions
P N6 DN 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 B 140 150 180 200 240 260 300 D1 90 100 130 140 160 190 210 D2 65 75 100 110 130 150 170 D3 48 58 78 88 108 124 144 d 11 11 14 14 14 19 19 H1 70 75 90 100 120 130 150 Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 B 150 160 200 230 290 310 350 D1 105 115 150 165 185 200 220 D2 75 85 110 125 145 160 180 P N10 D3 56 65 84 99 118 132 156 d 14 14 19 19 19 19 19 H1 75 80 100 115 145 155 175 Holes 4 4 4 4 4 8 8
Description The VG9000 Series cast iron flanged valves are designed primarily to regulate the flow of water and low pressure steam in response to the demand of a controller, in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. These valves are available in two-way, Push-Down-To-Open and three way mixing configurations. Three models of electric actuator are available as standard for this valve: The VA-7150 for DN 2050, the VA7200 for DN 2565, and the RA-3000 for DN 80100 valves. Each model can be ordered with either 3-point or 010 VDC proportional control. Features PN 6 and PN 10 rated series from DN 20 to DN 100 in two-way PDTO and three-way mixing configurations Full DIN / IEC flow capacity for all valves DN 20 DN 100 Uses Johnson Controls dual u-cup ring packing Brass Plug with soft seal for tight shut-off on both control and by-pass ports Electric actuators available either factory mounted, or separately for insitu installation Face to Face dimensions according DIN / IEC standard
DN 20-100 PG 6 VG9000 Series Flanged Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN Nominal VA-7150-1000 (connect. Kvs VA-7200-1000 RA-3000-722x Stroke VA-7700-1000 size) 1000 N 1800 N 500 N
RA-3000-732x 3000 N
Type-Model Number
2-way PDTO
20 25 40 50 65 80 100 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 8-mm 13-mm 600 590 330 190 100 600 480 290 150 VG94B6S1P6 VG94B5S1P6 VG94B4S1P6 VG94B3S1P6 VG94B2S1P6 VG94B1S1P6 VG94C1S1P6 VG94E2S1P6 VG94E1S1P6 VG94F1S1P6 VG94G1S1P6 VG94H1S1P6 VG94J1S1P6 VG98B6S1P6 VG98B5S1P6 VG98B4S1P6 VG98B3S1P6 VG98B2S1P6 VG98B1S1P6 VG98C1S1P6 VG98E2S1P6 VG98E1S1P6 VG98F1S1P6 VG98G1S1P6 VG98H1S1P6 VG98J1S1P6
19-mm 25-mm
280 170
510 320
3-way Mixing
0.63 1.0 1.6 20 8-mm 600 2.5 4.0 6.3 25 10 13-mm 490 600 16 250 40 25 130 440 19-mm 50 40 60 260 65 63 130 80 100 25-mm 100 160 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
270 160
510 310
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
88
VG9000 Series Flanged 2-Way and Mixing Valves for water and Glycol solutions (max. 30%), DN 20 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 & PN 10. Fluid temp. limit 0 140 C (continued)
RA-3000-732x 3000 N
2-way PDTO
20 25 40 50 65 80 100 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 8-mm 13-mm 1000 980 640 360 210 110 1000 820 510 310 160 VG94B6S1P0 VG94B5S1P0 VG94B4S1P0 VG94B3S1P0 VG94B2S1P0 VG94B1S1P0 VG94C1S1P0 VG94E2S1P0 VG94E1S1P0 VG94F1S1P0 VG94G1S1P0 VG94H1S1P0 VG94J1S1P0 VG98B6S1P0 VG98B5S1P0 VG98B4S1P0 VG98B3S1P0 VG98B2S1P0 VG98B1S1P0 VG98C1S1P0 VG98E2S1P0 VG98E1S1P0 VG98F1S1P0 VG98G1S1P0 VG98H1S1P0 VG98J1S1P0
19-mm 25-mm
280 170
510 320
3-way Mixing
0.63 1.0 1.6 1000 20 8-mm 2.5 4.0 6.3 880 25 10 13-mm 430 1000 16 220 720 40 25 110 420 19-mm 50 40 40 240 65 63 120 80 100 25-mm 100 160 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
260 160
490 310
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
89
Dimensions
VA-7150 VA-7200
Weight (kg)
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.0
2.5
3.5
VGS800W1N Series PN 16, Rp to Rp 2, Male Threaded Bronze Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa Body size DN (mm) Kvs Nominal Stroke VA-7150-820x VA-7200-820x 500 N 1000 N
Type-Model Number
3-way Mixing
0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40
VGS8A5W1N VGS8A4W1N
15
13 mm
958
1600
1 1 1 2
20 25 32 40 50
13 mm
Pipe muffles Muffles Order code 121 4935 151 DN15 / Rp 121 4935 201 DN20 / Rp 121 4935 251 DN25 / Rp 1 121 4935 321 DN32 / Rp 1 121 4935 401 DN40 / Rp 1 121 4935 501 DN50 / Rp 2 3 pipe muffels are needed for the mixing valves.
Modkit 3-way in 2-way Mod kit for: Order code 121 4930 151 DN15 / Rp 121 4930 201 DN20 / Rp 121 4930 251 DN25 / Rp 1 121 4930 321 DN32 / Rp 1 121 4930 401 DN40 / Rp 1 121 4930 501 DN50 / Rp 2 2 pipe muffles and 1 modkit are required to alter a 3-way valve into a 2-way valve
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
90
VBB Series Pressure Balanced Flanged 2-way Valves DN 50 DN 150 Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C* Nodular Iron PN 16 & 25, For water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam.
Dimensions PN25
D 1 D 2 D 3 d B olts H oles
18 18 18 18 22 22
4 4 8 8 8 8
18 18 18 22 26 26
4 8 8 8 8 8
VBB Series Pressure Balanced Flanged 2-way (PDTC) Valves Selection Table PN16 PN25 Closing pressure kPa
RA-3000 1800N RA-3000 3000N FA-2200-751x 2400N FA-2500-751x 2400N FA-2300-741x 2200N FA-2600-741x 2200N
DN
Kvs
Type-Model Number
50 40 1600 1600 1600 65 63 80 100 1600 PN16 100 160 1600 125 250 1600 150 360 1600 50 40 2500 2500 2500 65 63 80 100 2500 PN25 100 160 2500 125 250 2500 150 360 2500 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752)
1600
1600
2500
2500
VBB-2712-5200 VBB-2812-5200 VBB-2912-5200 VBB-3012-5200 VBB-3112-5200 VBB-3212-5200 VBB-4712-5200 VBB-4812-5200 VBB-4912-5200 VBB-5012-5200 VBB-5112-5200 VBB-5212-5200
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
91
VBD Series Flanged 2and 3-way Valves DN 15 DN 150 Nodular Iron PN 25, Fluid temp. limits +2 200 C (-20 C when glycerine cup is used)*. For water, glycol solutions (max 50%) or steam.
VBD Series Valves with Pneumatic and Electric Actuators Flange Dimensions
DN D 1 D 2 D 3 d B olts H oles DN D 1
Dimensions
D 2
D 3
B olts
H oles
15 25 40 50 65
45 68 88 102 122
14 14 18 18 18
4 4 4 4 8
18 22 26 26 -
8 8 8 8 -
Closing pressure kPa RA-3000 VA-7200 FA-1000 FA-2000711x 1000N 1600N 1800N 3000N 700N 2000N
DN Kvs
2-way NC (PDTO) 0.63 1 15 1.6 2500 2500 2500 2.5 4.0 13 6.3 25 880 1970 1370 10 16 380 40 230 1100 25 2-way NO (PDTC) 50 40 480 65 63 220 25 80 100 100 160 125 250 42 150 360 VBD Series Flanged 3-way Mixing Valves Selection Table 0.63 1 15 1.6 1700 2500 1500 2.5 13 4.0 25 6.3 360 1000 270 10 40 16 710 25 50 40 480 1130 25 65 63 220 590 80 100 330 100 160 180 42 125 250 90 150 360 40 * (above 120 C limitations in accordance with DIN 4747 and 4752) ** Soft seat, stellite trim, glycerine cup available on request.
VBD-4254-5200 VBD-4244-5200 VBD-4234-5200 VBD-4224-5200 VBD-4214-5200 VBD-4424-5200 VBD-4414-5200 VBD-4624-5200 VBD-4614-5200 VBD-4712-5200 VBD-4812-5200 VBD-4912-5200 VBD-5012-5200 VBD-5112-5200 VBD-5212-5200 VBD-4258-5200 VBD-4248-5200 VBD-4238-5200 VBD-4228-5200 VBD-4218-5200 VBD-4428-5200 VBD-4418-5200 VBD-4628-5200 VBD-4618-5200 VBD-4718-5200 VBD-4818-5200 VBD-4918-5200 VBD-5018-5200 VBD-5118-5200 VBD-5218-5200
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
92
VBF Series Flanged 2and 3-way Valves DN 15 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 and PN 10, Fluid temp. limits +2 to 130 C For water, glycol solutions (max 50%).
Dimensions
Flange Dimensions PN 10
Features PN 6 and PN 10 rated valves in 2-way and 3-way mixing configurations. Full DIN / IEC flow capacity for all valves DN 15DN 100. Uses PTFE guided stainless steel stem with dual O-ring seal packing. Brass plug with soft seal for tight (no leakage) shut-off on both control and bypass ports. Electric actuators available either factory mounted, or separately for in-situ installation. Slotted stem for quick-fit coupler system Face to face dimensions according DIN/IEC standard.
VBF Series (PN 6) Flanged 2-way PDTC (normally closed) Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN Kvs Nominal Stroke VA-7150-820x 500N VA-7200-820x 1000N RA-3000-722x 1800N RA-3000-732x 3000N VBF-0254-5200 VBF-0244-5200 Type-Model Number
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
93
VBF Series Flanged 2and 3-way Valves DN 15 DN 100 Cast Iron PN 6 and PN 10, Fluid temp. limits +2 to 130 C For water, glycol solutions (max 50%). (continued)
350 190 -
30 mm
VBF Series (PN 10) Flanged 2-way PDTO (normally closed) Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN Kvs Nominal Stroke VA-7150-820x 500N VA-7200-820x 1000N RA-3000-722x 1800N RA-3000-732x 3000N VBF-2254-5200 VBF-2244-5200 VBF-2234-5200 VBF-2224-5200 VBF-2214-5200 VBF-2314-5200 VBF-2414-5200 VBF-2514-5200 VBF-2614-5200 VBF-2714-5200 VBF-2814-5200 VBF-2914-5200 VBF-3014-5200 Type-Model Number
30 mm
VBF Series Flanged (PN 10) 3-way Valves Selection Table Closing pressure kPa DN Kvs Nominal Stroke VA-7150-820x 500N VA-7200-820x 1000N RA-3000-722x 1800N RA-3000-732x 3000N Type-Model Number VBF-2258-5200 VBF-2248-5200 VBF-2238-5200 VBF-2228-5200 VBF-2218-5200 VBF-2318-5200 VBF-2418-5200 VBF-2518-5200 VBF-2618-5200 VBF-2718-5200 VBF-2818-5200 VBF-2918-5200 VBF-3018-5200
30 mm
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
94
Dimensions in mm
Wiring VA-7010 Electric On/Off Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Minimum Force Full Stroke Time Nominal Stroke Protection Class Type-Model Number VA-7010-8101 VA-7010-8103
90 N
ON 10 s OFF 5 s
3 mm (max. 5mm)
IP 40
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
95
C 1,5 44,5
VA-7040 with VG5000 valve body (left) and VA-7040 with VG4000 valve body (right)
2m B
Description The VA-7040 electric thermal actuator provides a two position (open / closed) control and can easily be mounted onto VG4000 and VG5000 series terminal unit valves. The construction of the power element provides a smooth opening or closing action and is ideal for comfort installations. Features Low and line voltage models available Compact design Can be mounted after valve body is installed Actuator can be rotated after mounting Smooth action NC/NO field-selectable Stroke indication C
M28 x 1,5
52 A
Actuator
VA-7040-2x VA-7047-2x
A 32
34
69
B
10 11
M30 x 1,5
Wiring VA-7040 Electric Thermal Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Nominal Force Nominal Stroke
Dimensions in mm
Protection Class
Valve type
3W
2,5 W
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
96
VA-715x-100x
VA-715x-820x
Dimensions in mm
VA-7150 Electric Valve Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Action/Control Motor Ratings Electronic Positioner Ratings Valve Type Type-Model Number
Floating (3 point) Optional 010 VDC feedback Optional 2 k feedback Optional 1 aux. switch Proportional 010 VDC 24 V 15% Floating (3 point) Optional 010 VDC feedback Optional 2 k feedback Optional 1 aux. switch Proportional 010 VDC
VG7000 VG9000 2 VA, 100k input impedance 2.7 VA VBF 2 VA, 100k input impedance VG7000 VG9000 VBF
VA-7150-1001
VA-7152-1001
VA-7150-8201
230 V 15%
Floating (3 point)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
97
1 2 3
M M
L 230 VAC N
VA-7246-xx01
VA-7200 Electric Valve Actuator Floating Models Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Motor Ratings Enclosure Protection Valve Type Manual Override 0..10 V 2 k Aux. Feedback switches Feedback Pot. Pot. Type-Model Number VA-7200-1001 VA-7201-1001 VA-7203-1001 VA-7220-1001 VA-7240-1001 VA-7241-1001 VA-7243-1001 VA-7250-1001 VA-7270-1001
24 V 15%
5.6 VA at 50 Hz 6.7 at 60 Hz
IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 40 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42
2 2 1
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
98
24 V 15%
5.6 VA at 50 Hz 6.7 at 60 Hz
IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
2 2 1
VA-7200 Electric Valve Actuator Proportional Models (010 V) Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Motor Ratings Enclosure Protection Valve Type Manual Override 0..10 V 2 k Aux. Feedback switches Feedback Pot. Pot. Type-Model Number VA-7202-1001 VA-7206-1001 VA-7222-1001 VA-7242-1001 VA-7246-1001 VA-7252-1001 VA-7272-1001 VA-7202-8201 VA-7206-8201 VA-7222-8201 VA-7242-8201 VA-7246-8201 VA-7252-8201 VA-7272-8201
24 V 15%
5.6 VA at 50 Hz 6.7 at 60 Hz
IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 40 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42 IP 40 IP 42 IP 42 IP 42
2 2 2 2 -
24 V 15%
5.6 VA at 50 Hz 6.7 at 60 Hz
yes yes Switch for manual override signal yes yes Switch for manual override signal
VA-7200 Electric Valve Actuator 230 V FloatingSelection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Action/Control Motor Ratings Enclosure Protection Valve Type Manual Override 0..10 V 2 Aux. switches Feedback Pot. Type-Model Number VA-7200-1003 VA-7240-1003 VA-7200-8203 VA-7240-8203
VG7000 and VG9000 IP 40 yes 5.6 VA at 50 Hz 230 V series Floating +10/-15% 6.7 at 60 Hz IP 42 VBD,VBF and IP 40 yes VG8000 Note: All models with manual override and 24 V power supply are equipped with a power cut-off switch. IP 42
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
99
24 V 15%
Incremental proportional
010 V
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 100
VA-7450 microprocessor-based actuator with VG5000 (left) and VB-5040-S (right) valves
Dimensions
K
Valve Type Type-Model Number VA-7450-1001
VA-7450 Electric Valve Unit Valve Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Action/Control Command signal Nominal Force Settings
VA-7452-1001 VA-7452-9001
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 101
87 167
150 90
152 160
VA-770x actuators without manual override A 80 mm VA-774x actuators with manual override With mechanical manual override A 25 mm
auto
auto
auto
PCB
10 11 12
M M
max24V~(1A)
M M
10 11 12
4 15 16 10 11 12
max 24V ~(1A) input output
max 2mA at 10 V DC 5 k
max 230V~(1A)
L 230V~ N
max 1.5-mm2
24V~
Com
max 1.5-mm2
Com 24V ~
max 1.5-mm2
Description The VA-77xx Series synchronous motor driven actuator, for valves in heating, ventilation and air conditioning applications, is available for incremental (floating) control or proportional control with 0-10 V position feedback signal. It provides a stroke capability of 8 mm to a maximum 20 mm. This compact, non-spring return actuator has a 500 N nominal force and responds to a variety of input signals. The actuator can be combined with VG7000 and VG9000 valves in accordance with the maximum close-off pressure ratings specified (see pertinent valve product bulletins). They can be ordered as a separate unit or as a factory fitted valve / actuator combination. Features Self adjusting proportional actuators Column of 5 Light Emitting Diodes Optional models with mechanical manual override Manual contact micro switch on all models with manual override IP54 protection class Unique C shaped yoke design Positioner with selectable starting point and span, direct and reverse action modes Magnetic clutch Selectable Signal failure position
VA-7740-1001 VA-7740-1003 Incremental models, 24 VAC Incremental models, 230 supply VAC supply Without mechanical manual override
PCB
4 15 16
M M
M M
24V~
Com
max 1.5-mm2
L 230V~ N
input
output
m ax 2m A at 10 V DC 5 k
max 1.5-mm2
Com 24V~
max 1.5-mm2
VA-7700 Electric Valve Unit Valve Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Action/Control Command signal Manual Override Nomina l Force Settings Valve Type Type-Model Number VA-7700-1001 VA-7700-1003
-
24 V 15% 230 VAC 15% 24 V 15% 230 VAC 15% 24 V 15% Incremental models (3-point) Positioner Adjustment Time (PAT
No Mechanical Electrical Electrical and Mechanical 500 N Configurable VG7000 and VG9000
Proportional models
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 102
Dimensions
Max. 1.5mm 2
9
1 2
FA-1000 Spring return Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage Action/Control Nominal Force Nominal Stroke Nominal Running Speed Valve Type Type-Model* Number FA-1000-1101 FA-1000-2101 FA-1040-1106 FA-1040-2106
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 103
A
A
FA25/26/27
3-Point Models
Proportional Models
FA-2000 Spring return Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50Hz) Action/Control Nominal Force Nominal Stroke Auxiliary contacts (2) Close off direction Type-Model Number FA-2441-7116 FA-2741-7116 FA-2400-7116 FA-2700-7116 FA-2401-7116 FA-2701-7116 FA-2400-7111 FA-2700-7111 FA-2401-7111 FA-2701-7111
2 2 2 2 -
230 VAC
3-point
2 2
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 104
2 2 2 2 -
Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up Down Up
230 VAC
3-point
2 2
2 2 2 2 -
230 VAC
3-point
2 2
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 105
Dimensions
3-Point Models FA-3000 Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50Hz) Action/Control Nominal Force
Proportional Models
Nominal Stroke
Potentiometer 2 kOhm
Type-Model Number FA-3340-7416 FA-3341-7416 FA-3300-7416 FA-3301-7416 FA-3302-7416 FA-3300-7411 FA-3301-7411 FA-3302-7411
YES YES
230 VAC
3 point, Incremental
YES YES
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 106
H1
RA-3000 Actuator with VG8000N valve
RA-3xxx712x 58 mm
RA-3xxx722x 66 mm
RA-3xxx732x 66 mm
Dimensions
K
3-Point Models RA-3000 Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Action/Control Nominal Force Nominal Stroke Auxiliary contacts (2) Potentiometer 2 kOhm Manual Override Type-Model Number RA-3041-7126 RA-3141-7126 RA-3000-7126 RA-3003-7126 RA-3103-7126 RA-3000-7127 RA-3003-7127 RA-3103-7127 RA-3041-7226 RA-3141-7226 RA-3000-7226 RA-3003-7226 RA-3103-7226 RA-3000-7227 RA-3003-7227 RA-3103-7227 Proportional Models
230 VAC
3 point
230 VAC
3 point
YES YES
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 107
230 VAC
3 point
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 108
S7
54+ 0, 2
Dimensions
RA-3x41
M
S7
S1 S2 E S3 E S4 P 2
S7
S1
S2 EPOS 4
B A2 A1 O E P Y U
S3
S4
19 20 1
M
3 17 16
M
4 6
7 9
10 11 12
19 2 0
Description The RA-3000-7410 series synchronous motordriven reversible actuators are available for 3point (floating) or with electric positioner for 010 V control. They feature factory calibrated pressure switches to provide specified close-off ratings. These actuators are available with 3000 N nominal force and can be used with BF, BD and BB series valves according to the maximum close-off pressure ratings specified. The RA-3000-7410 series, electric actuators replace the EA-3000-7610 series, which has been discontinued. Features Uses synchronous motor with force dependent end switches. Models for 3-point and proportional 010 V control. Positioner with adjustable starting point, span, and direct / reverse action. Active 010 VDC position feedback on proportional models. Optional hand wheel.
max. 2,5 mm
O E
0...10 V =
4 6 5
7 9 8
L N
ma x. 2 ,5 mm
L
N
24 V~
3-Point Models RA-3000-7410 Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50Hz) Action/Con trol Nominal Force
Proportional Models
3 63
K
Auxiliary contacts (2) Potentiometer 2 kOhm Manual Override Type-Model Number RA-3041-7416 RA-3141-7416 RA-3000-7416 RA-3003-7416 RA-3103-7416 RA-3000-7417 RA-3003-7417 RA-3103-7417
Nominal Stroke
230 VAC
3 point
YES YES
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 109
H1
RA-3100 Actuator with VG8000N valve
RA-3100 RA-3103
RA-31xx-8126 58 mm
RA-31xx-8226 66 mm
Dimensions
RA-3141
S7
S1 S2 S3
E 2 S4 P 1
S1
S2 EPOS 4
S7
B A 2 A1 0 E P Y U
E S3
E S4
19 20 1
M
3 17 16
M
4 6 5
7 9 8 10 11 12
max . 2,5 mm
19 20 B
O O E 0...10 V= Y
4 6 5
7 9 8
L
N
RA-3100-8x26 24 V~
max. 2,5 mm
L N
24 V~
3-Point Models RA-3100 Electric Actuator Selection Table Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) DN Nominal Stroke Nominal Force Action/ Control
Potentiometer 2 kOhm
24 VAC 10% 50 Hz 1540 13 mm 1200N 3 point or 010 V YES YES 24 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz 5080 100150 25 mm 42 mm 1700N 3 point or 010 V YES YES
YES YES -
YES YES
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 110
K
Dimensions Direct Acting Actuator MP8000 Pneumatic Actuator Selection Table Action Mode Spring Range (kPa) Nominal Stroke Spring Force (N) Type-Model Number MP822C6020 MP822E6020 MP822E7020 MP832C6020 MP832E6020 Dimensions Reserve Acting Actuator
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 111
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Silence 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Adj. Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* DAN1.N DAN1.SN DAN2.N DAN2.SN Johnson Controls M-9304-AGA-1N M-9304-AGC-1N M-9304-ADA-1N M-9304-ADC-1N
Yes Yes
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 112
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Silence 2-point Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque 4Nm Running time (s) 35 Damper size (m2) 0.8 Control signals 2 point 2 x Adj. Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) 230 VAC Type-Model Number Joventa*
DAN2.C DAN2.SC
Yes
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 113
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Silence Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* DMN1.2N Johnson Controls M9304-GGA-1N
4Nm
35
0.8
0 10 VDC
24 VAC/DC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 114
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Feed back Supply Voltage Potentiometer (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* Johnson Controls M9108-AGA-1 M9108-AGC-1 M9108-AGE-1 M9108-AGD-1 M9108-ADA-1 M9108-ADC-1 M9108-ADE-1 M9108-ADD-1 M9116-AGA-1 M9116-AGC-1 M9116-AGE-1 M9116-AGD-1 M9116-ADA-1 M9116-ADC-1 M9116-ADE-1 M9116-ADD-1 M9124-AGA-1 M9124-AGC-1 M9124-AGE-1 M9124-AGD-1 M9124-ADA-1 M9124-ADC-1 M9124-ADE-1 M9124-ADD-1
Yes 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes 125 160 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes 1 KOhm 140 Ohm
24 VAC/DC
8Nm
30 45
1.5
2 and 3 point
230 VAC
DAS1 DAS1.S DAS1.P1 DAS1.P2 DAS2 DAS2.S DAS2.P1 DAS2.P2 DA1 DA1.S DA1.P1 DA1.P2 DA2 DA2.S DA2.P1 DA2.P2 DAL1 DAL1.S DAL1.P1 DAL1.P2 DAL2 DAL2.S DAL2.P1 DAL2.P2
24 VAC/DC
16Nm
80 110
2 and 3 point
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24Nm
4.5
2 and 3 point
230 VAC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 115
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard 2- and 3-point Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Feed back Potentio-meter Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa*
DAG1 DAG1.S
Johnson Controls
M9132-AGA-1 M9132-AGC-1 M9132-AGE-1 M9132-AGD-1 M9132-AGF-1 M9132-ADA-1 M9132-ADC-1 M9132-ADE-1 M9132-ADD-1 M9132-ADF-1
Yes 1 K Ohm 140 Ohm 2 K Ohhm Yes 1 K Ohm 140 Ohm 2 K Ohhm 230 VAC 24 VAC/DC
32 Nm
140
2 and 3 point
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 116
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Y1
0(2)10 VDC
Signals Y2
0(4)20 mA
2 x Auxiliary contacts U
0(2)10 VDC
Type-Model Number Joventa* DMS1.1 Johnson Controls M9108-GGA-1 M9108-GGC-1 M9116-GGA-1 M9116-GGC-1 M91024-GGA-1 M9124-GGC-1
8Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
1.5 3 4.5
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 117
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Y1
0(2)10 VDC
Signals Y2 U
0(2)10 VDC
2 x Auxiliary contacts
Type-Model Number Joventa* DMS2.2 Johnson Controls M9108-GDA-1 M9108-GDC-1 M9116-GDA-1 M9116-GDC-1 M9124-GDA-1 M9124-GDC-1
8Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
1.5 3 4.5
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
None
Page 118
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x adjustable auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* DMS1.3 DMS1.3S Johnson Controls M9108-JGA-1 M9108-JGC-1 M9116-JGA-1 M9116-JGC-1 M9124-JGA-1 M9124-JGC-1
8Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 119
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Y1 Signals Y2 U 2x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* DMG1.1 DMG1.1S Johnson Controls M9132-CGA-1 M9132-CGC-1
32 Nm
140
010 VDC
020 mA
010 VDC
Yes
24 VAC/DC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 120
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams Standard Modulating Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Y1
0(4)20 mA Ri> 100 Ohm
Signals Y2 U
0(2)10 VDC Ri > 50 Ohm
2 x Auxiliary contacts
Type-Model Number Joventa* DMS2.5 Johnson Controls M9108-GDA-1.01 M9108-GDC-1.01 M9116-GDA-1.01 M9116-GDC-1.01 M9124-GDA-1.01 M9124-GDC-1.01
8Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
1.5 3 4.5
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
None
Page 121
Dimensions
Wiring
Spring-return 2-point Electric Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) motor spring Damper size Control signals (m2) 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* DA1.F DA1.FS DA2.F DA2.FS Johnson Controls M9216-BGA-1 M9216-BGC-1 M9216-BDA-1 M9216-BDC-1
16 Nm
90 120
10
2 point
Yes Yes
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 122
Dimensions
16 Nm
90 120
10
DA1.4FP1 DA1.4FP2
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 123
Dimensions
L
1 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) 24 VAC 230 VAC Type-Model Number Joventa
DAF1.06 DAF1.06S DAF2.06 DAF2.06S
Torque
Control signals
Johnson Controls
M9206-BGA-1S M9206-BGB-1S M9206-BDA-1S M9206-BDB-1S
6 Nm 10...65
35...70
1.1
2 point
Yes Yes
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 124
Dimensions
16 Nm
90
10
010 VDC
0 20 mA
Yes
24 VAC/VDC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 125
Wiring Diagrams Security Fire Spring-return 2-point Actuators for Safety Dampers Selection Table
Control signal 2 x Adjustable Auxiliary contacts Spring return direction Square Shaft Size (mm) Damper size
Angle Rotation
Thermosensor
L
Type-Model Number
10
According to manufacturers instructions
SFL1.90/10
T T T T T T T T
SFL1.90T/10 SFL1.90/11 SFL1.90T/11 SFL1.90/12 SFL1.90T/12 SFL1.90/14 SFL1.90T/14 SFR1.90/10 SFR1.90T/10 SFR1.90/11 SFR1.90T/11 SFR1.90/12 SFR1.90T/12 SFR1.90/14 SFR1.90T/14
11 12 14 2-point Yes 10 11 12 14
Left
16 Nm
90..120
10
90
24VAC/VDC
Right
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 126
Angle Rotation
Thermosensor
Type-Model Number
10
According to manufacturers instructions
SFL2.90/10
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
SFL2.90T/10 SFL2.90/11 SFL2.90T/11 SFL2.90/12 SFL2.90T/12 SFL2.90/14 SFL2.90T/14 SFR2.90/10 SFR2.90T/10 SFR2.90/11 SFR2.90T/11 SFR2.90/12 SFR2.90T/12 SFR2.90/14 SFR2.90T/14 SFL1.180/10 SFL1.180T/10 SFL1.180/11 SFL1.180T/11 SFL1.180/12 SFL1.180T/12 SFL1.180/14 SFL1.180T/14 SFR1.180/10 SFR1.180T/10 SFR1.180/11 SFR1.180T/11 SFR1.180/12 SFR1.180T/12 SFR1.180/14 SFR1.180T/14
11 12 14 2-point Yes 10 11 12 14 10
Left
16 Nm
90..120
10
90
230 VAC
Right
11 12 14 2-point Yes 10 11 12 14
Left
10 Nm
120150
10
180
24VAC/VDC
Right
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 127
Angle Rotation
Thermosensor
Type-Model Number
10
According to manufacturers instructions
SFL2.180/10
T T T T T T T T
SFL2.180T/10 SFL2.180/11 SFL2.180T/11 SFL2.180/12 SFL2.180T/12 SFL2.180/14 SFL2.180T/14 SFR2.180/10 SFR2.180T/10 SFR2.180/11 SFR2.180T/11 SFR2.180/12 SFR2.180T/12 SFR2.180/14 SFR2.180T/14
11 12 14 2-point Yes 10 11 12 14
Left
10 Nm
120...150
10
180
230 VAC
Right
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 128
Wiring Diagrams Security Smoke 2-point Safety Actuators for Smoke Dampers Selection Table
Damper size 2 x Auxiliary contacts Direction of Rotation Angle of Rotation Supply Voltage (50/60Hz)
Control signals
Type-Model Number
L
SEL1.90/10 SEL1.90/11 SEL1.90/12 SEL1.90/14 SER1.90/10 SER1.90/11 SER1.90/12 SER1.90/14 SEL2.90/10 SEL2.90/11 SEL2.90/12 SEL2.90/14 SER2.90/10 SER2.90/11 SER2.90/12 SER2.90/14
Left
As specified by the manufacturer
90
10 11 12 14 10 11 12 14 10 11 12 14 10 11 12 14
24VAC/VDC
40 Nm
60
60
230VAC
Right
90
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 129
L
Type Number BSLC 24-SB
Angle Rotation
Thermosensor
Control signal
motor
spring
Type-Model Number
10
According to manufacturers instructions
SFL1.90SLC/10
T T T T
11 12
16 Nm
90
90
SFL1.90 SLC /12 SFL1.90T SLC /12 SFL1.90 SLC /14 SFL1.90T SLC /14 SFL1.180 SLC /10 SFL1.180T SLC /10 SFL1.180 SLC /11 SFL1.180T SLC /11 SFL1.180 SLC /12 SFL1.180T SLC /12 SFL1.180 SLC /14 SFL1.180T SLC 14
10
SLC
Yes 10 11 12
Left
T T T T
10 Nm
120
180
Continued on next page. For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004 Page 130
Angle Rotation
Thermosensor
Type-Model Number
10
According to manufacturers instructions
T T T T
SFR1.90T SLC /10 SFR1.90 SLC /11 SFR1.90T SLC /11 SFR1.90 SLC /12
24V from Safety Module
11 12
16 Nm
90
90
SFR1.90T SLC /12 SFR1.90 SLC /14 SFR1.90T SLC /14 SFR1.180 SLC /10 SFR1.180T SLC /10 SFR1.180 SLC /11 SFR1.180T SLC /11 SFR1.180 SLC /12 SFR1.180T SLC /12 SFR1.180 SLC /14 SFR1.180T SLC /14
10
SLC
Yes 10 11 12
Right
T T T T
10 Nm
120
180
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 131
BSLC 24-SR
Control signals
Type-Model Number
90
40 Nm
60
60
10 11 12 14 10 11 12 14
SEL1.90SLC/10 SEL1.90 SLC /11 SEL1.90 SLC /12 SEL1.90 SLC /14 SER1.90 SLC /10 SER1.90 SLC /11 SER1.90 SLC /12 SER1.90 SLC /14
90
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 132
Accessories for mixer mounting kits - ZMA001 for Esbe mixers - ZMA002 for Centra-Duplex mixers - ZMA003 for Holter mixers - ZMA004 for GF ball valves
Wiring Diagrams Valve 2 and 3-point Electric Mixing Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number * MA1 MA1.S MA2 MA2.S
16 Nm
120
2- and 3-point
Yes Yes
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 133
Wiring Diagrams Valve Modulating Electric Mixing Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Y1 Signals Y2 U 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* Johnson Controls M9116-GGA-1.02 M9116-GGC-1.02
16 Nm
120
010 VDC
Yes
24 VAC
MM1.1 MM1.1S
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 134
Wiring Diagrams Valve Modulating Electric Mixing Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Y1 Signals Y2 U Voltage 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number * MM2.2 MM2.2S
16
120
0(2)10 VDC
none
0(2)10 VDC
Yes
230 VAC/VDC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 135
Dimensions
Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Feed back Potentiometer Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* SA1.10 SA1.10S SA1.10P1 SA1.10P2 SA2.10 SA2.10S SA1.12 SA1.12S SA1.12P1 SA1.12P2 SA2.12 SA2.12S Johnson Controls M9116-AGA-1.04 M9116-AGC-1.04 M9116-AGE-1.04 M9116-AGD-1.04 M9116-ADA-1.04 M9116-ADC-1.04 M9108-AGA-1.04 M9108-AGC-1.04 M9108-AGE-1.04 M9108-AGD-1.04 M9108-ADA-1.04 M9108-ADC-1.04
Yes 16 Nm 16 3 2 and 3 point 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes Yes 8 Nm 8 1.5 2 and 3 point 1 KOhm 140 Ohm Yes
24 VAC/DC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
230 VAC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 136
Dimensions
Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Open Close Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number * SA1.26
16 Nm 4 Nm
90 8
360 30
Yes Yes
24 VAC/DC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 137
Dimensions
Special 2- and 3-point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* SA3.30 SA3.30S SA4.30 SA4.30S SA6.30 SA6.30S M9116-AAA-1 M9116-AAC-1 Johnson Controls
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 138
Dimensions
Special Spring-return 2-point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Open Close Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* SA3.30F SA3.30FS SA4.30F SA4.30FS SA6.30F SA6.30FS M9216-BAA-1 M9216-BAC-1 Johnson Controls
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 139
Dimensions
Special Spring-return 2-point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50/60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* SAS1.23 SAS1.23S Johnson Controls M9108-AGA-1.03 M9108-AGC-1.03 M9116-AGA-1.03 M9116-AGC-1.03 M9124-AGA-1.03 M9124-AGC-1.03 M9108-ADA-1.03 M9108-ADC-1.03 M9116-ADA-1.03 M9116-ADC-1.03 M9124-ADA-1.03 M9124-ADC-1.03
8 Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm 8 Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
30 80 125 30 80 125
SA1.23 SA1.23S SAL1.23 SAL1.23S SAS2.23 SAS2.23S SA2.23 SA2.23S SAL2.23 SAL2.23S
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 140
Dimensions
Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Signals Y1
010 VDC
Y2
020 mA
U
010 VDC
2x Auxiliary contacts
Type-Model Number * Joventa SM1.10 SM1.10S SM1.12 SM1,12S Johnson Controls M9116-GGA-1.04 M9116-GGC-1.04 M9108-GGA-1.04 M9108-GGC-1.04
16 Nm 8 Nm
16 8
3 1.5
Yes Yes
24 VAC/VDC
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 141
Dimensions
Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Signals Y1
0(4)20 mA
Y2
U
0(2)..10 VDC
2 x Auxiliary contacts
Type-Model Number Joventa* SMS4.5 SMS4.5S Johnson Controls M9108-GAA-1.01 M9108-GAC-1.01 M9116-GAA-1.01 M9116-GAC-1.01 M9124-GAA-1.01 M9124-GAC-1.01
8 Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
1.5 3 4.5
None
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 142
Dimensions
Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Signals Y1
0(2)..10 VDC
Y2
U
0(2)..10 VDC
2 x Auxiliary contacts
Type-Model Number Joventa* SMS4.2 SMS4.2S Johnson Controls M9108-GAA-1 M9108-GAC-1 M9116-GAA-1 M9116-GAC-1 M9124-GAA-1 M9124-GAC-1
8 Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
1.5 3 4.5
None
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 143
Dimensions
Special 2- and 3 Point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50Hz) Type-Model Number * SAS3.30 SAS3.30S SAS4.30 SAS4.30S SAS6.30 SAS6.30S
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 144
Dimensions
Special 2- and 3 Point Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Control signals 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50Hz) Type-Model Number * SAL3.30 SAL3.30S SAL4.30 SAL4.30S SAL6.30 SAL6.30S
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 145
Dimensions
Special Modulating Electric Damper Actuator Selection Table Torque Running time (s) Damper size (m2) Signals Y1 Y2 U 2 x Auxiliary contacts Supply Voltage (50-60Hz) Type-Model Number Joventa* SMS1.23
0..10 VDC 0..10 VDC 020 mA
8 Nm 16 Nm 24 Nm
30 60 125
1.5 3 4.5
* by adding a K after the type number you will acquire the same model with a Halogene free cable (1 m)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 146
PA-PF Transmitters
Wiring Diagrams PA-PF for modulating actuators 24 V PA-PF Transmitters Selection Table Actuator Power Supply Frequency Output signals U
Output rating
Control signal V
Mounting
Type-Model Number PA PF PA PF
24 VAC/VDC 15 VDC+
For up to 5 actuators
0(2)10 VDC
Damper Linkage
Actuator/Damper Linkage Selection Table Description Type-Model Number Joventa ZK ZKA ZKH ZKG Johnson Controls M9000-ZK M9000-ZKA M9000-ZKH M9000-ZKG
Complete set of accessories Universal crank arm and adapter to be fixed to the damper shaft Crank arm to be fixed to the actuator, including a center bolt Two ball joints to be fixed to ZKA and ZKH and to be linked by a rod with an 8 mm thread. Two M8 nuts to secure the rod.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 147
IP 65 Housing
IP 65 Housing IP 65 Housing Selection Table Description Type-Model Number ZGS.12 ZGS.16 ZGS.18 ZGS.20 ZGS12V ZGF.12 ZGF.16 ZGF.18 ZGF.20 ZGF12V
For Standard actuator with round spindle 12 mm For Standard actuator with round spindle 16 mm For Standard actuator with round spindle 18 mm For Standard actuator with round spindle 20 mm For Standard actuator with square spindle 12 mm For Spring-Return actuator with round spindle 12 mm For Spring-Return actuator with round spindle 16 mm For Spring-Return actuator with round spindle 18 mm For Spring-Return actuator with round spindle 20 mm For Spring-Return actuator with square spindle 12 mm
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Sensor Temperature Sensor Selection Table Description Type-Model Number ST1.72N ST1.90N
Duct temperature sensor, 72 C, 24 VAC/VDC, Switch 3A max. Duct temperature sensor, 90 C, 24 VAC/VDC, Switch 3A max.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 148
Dimensions
Typical Wiring Diagram Series SC-9100 Easy DDC Controller Selection Table Application Examples
Single loop, 1 output Single loop, 2 output Outdoor air comp., 1 output Outdoor air comp., 2 output Cascade, 1 output Cascade, 2 output Single loop + limit, 1 output
M
Binary Outputs
TR1 TR2 AO1.2 AO2
Analog Inputs
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Binary Inputs
DI1 DI2
Analog Outputs
AO1.1
Type-Model Number
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
24 VAC, +15%-10%
SC-9100-8GEN-1*
* The SC-9100 has models that are defined to local applications. For the local code numbers, please contact your nearest supplier. Accessories (order separately)
Description Type-Model Number SC-9100-MK
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 149
LC D D is play
80
se t
e sc
Description The room command module SC-9180 with LCD display is designed for use with the SC9100 series Easy DDC controller. A Key pad and LCD display on the front of the module allow the room occupant to view and change the operating parameters of the connected SC-9100 controller. In addition, an occupancy button enables the occupant to change the mode operation of the controller from COMFORT to STANDBY or to request a temporary COMFORT during NIGHT operation. The current operating mode is shown by an LED indicator. Features LCD display with decimal point Temperature and setpoint reading Weekly scheduling Occupancy button Clock back-up supply
Dimensions
14 15
R/T Clock
Red Blue
21 24 Comm on
Extension cable
Brown
22 23
8 VDC
Typical Wiring Diagram Series SC-9180 Room Command Module Selection Table Displays Temperature Sensor Communications Interface Mounting Clock Backup Supply Mode Indicator Type-Model Number
15 hours
SC-9180-0000-W
M
SC-9180-1000-W
Accessories (order separately) Description Type-Model Number TM-9100-8931-W TM-9100-8941-W TM-9100-8951-W TM-9100-8900 SC-9180-8900 TE-9100-8501 TE-8800-8902 TE-8800-8901
Plastic base for surface mount (white RAL 9010) Mounting kit for wall box (white RAL 9010) Mounting kit for panel mount (white RAL 9010) Tool for opening module 20 m extention cable NTC element with 1.5 m cable Mounting kit for TE-9100-8501 Rubber grommet for NTC sensor cable For TM-9100 see page 62
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 150
Dimensions
TM-9 15 0/TM-91 60 Roo m C omman d Modu le
TC-9102 Controller 52 51 50 24 23 22 21
51
51
Common
Interna l Co nne cti ons
R emote Se t Poin t* * C ommo n N TC Sen sor Mod e LED Occupa ncy Butto n
tc2wwntc
23 22
21/24
20 15 14
20 15
Internal 20 Connections 15
14
Wiring to TM-9180 Room Command Module with Unit Mounted NTC Sensor
Series TC-9102 Fan Coil Unit Controller Selection Table Outputs Set point Range
2 x 0 to 10 VDC 2 x DAT 0 to 10 VDC Fan Control 2 x PAT 2 x 2 Stage On/Off 2 x 0 to 10 VDC 2 x DAT On/Off Fan 2 x PAT 2 x 2 Stage On/Off
12 -28C +/-3 K 12 -28C +/-3 K 12 -28C +/-3 K 12 -28C +/-3 K 12-28C +/-3 K 12-28C +/-3 K 12-28C +/-3 K 12-28C +/-3 K
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 151
Controller with standard terminals: b = 0, with separable terminals: b = 1 Notes: 1. Ordering codes must be used in orders to the Lomagna factory. 2. Modules with PWM control signal outputs have been discontinued. Contact your local Johnson Controls office for details of replacement controllers.
Software and Accessories Ordering Codes Ordering Code TE-9100-8501 TC-9100-TOOL WS-EURPRO-0 WS-EURPRO-6 Description
Unit Mount NTC Temperature Sensor (1.5-m cable) Commissioning Software for DOS (3.5" diskette) Configuration Tools Software for Windows, New (3.5" diskettes) Configuration Tools Software for Windows, Upgrade (3.5" diskettes)
Wiring
+
Analog 0 -10 VDC
+ M
_
When using multistranded wire, crimp a metal sleeve over the exposed conductors before inserting into terminals 60...71. M
PAT 24 VAC
DAT 24 VAC
External supply for fan 230 VAC L = Live Isolate before servicing.
+
24 VAC Common 24 VAC Supply
When using multistranded wire, crimp a metal sleeve over the exposed conductors before inserting into terminals 60...71.
PAT 24 VAC
3-Speed
DAT 24 VAC
Fan
+
24 VAC Common
M
24 VAC Supply
Ground
External supply for fan 230 VAC L = Live Isolate before servicing. N L
L
Ground
Fan
ON-OFF
Low
Med.
H ig h
71
70
61
60
42
41
40
32
31
30
71
70
63
62
61
60
Cooling Output
Heating Output
Power Supply
Cooling Output
Heating Output
Power Supply
See Note 2
See Note 2
Analog Inputs
Analog Common
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
Digital Common
Analog Common
10
11
12 13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
50
51
52
tc2onoff
tc2wir3s
See Note 3
Window Contact
Occupancy Sensor Mode LED NTC Sensor Remote Set Point
See Note 3
Window Contact
Mode LED
Occupancy Sensor
NTC Sensor
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 152
20
16
24
80
12
28
AUTO OFF 1
tmtbdim
Dimensions
Description The TM-9100 series of Room Command Modules are designed for use with the TC-9102 and TC-9109 series of DDC terminal unit controllers. The set point dial enables the room occupant to adjust the working set point of the controller within the range of 12 to 28C or -3 to +3 K, according to the model number. The occupancy button enables the occupant to switch the mode of operation of the controller between COMFORT and STANDBY or to request a temporary COMFORT mode during NIGHT operation. The current operating mode is shown by an LED indicator. For TC-9102 Fan Coil Unit controllers, a Room Command Module with a 3-speed fan override adjuster is available, and models without a temperature sensor are provided for application where the room temperature sensor is mounted inside the Fan Coil Unit.
Universal T C- 9100 Contr oller
T M-9 1 8 0 R o o m Co m ma n d M o du l e TB1 23
Voltage Supply Com mon
22
21/ 24
22
Vo l ta g e S u pp l y Com m on Common
24 22
2 1/24 20 15 14
Room Command Module without 3-Speed Fan Override, Mode LED and Occupancy Button
Room Command Module Ordering Codes Description Type-Model Number TM-9150-0000 TM-9160-0000 TM-9160-0005 TM-9160-0002 TM-9160-0007 TM-9170-0000 TM-9170-0005 TM-9170-0002 TM-9170-0007 TM-9190-0000 TM-9190-0005 TM-9180-0100 TM-9180-0200
w/o S.P. dial 12-28C NTC Sensor +/- 3 K 12-28C 3-Speed Fan Override +/- 3 K 3-Speed Fan Override Occupancy Button 12-28C +/- 3 K w/o Sensor 12-28C 3-Speed Fan Override +/- 3 K 3-Speed Fan Override 12-28C No Occupancy Button NTC Sensor No Fan Override +/- 3 K with View Mode and Clock Setting only LCD Display with View Mode and Programming Mode Note: All models above with off-white cover and grey base. Add -W to code for white cover and white base, e.g., TM-9150-0000-W. Add -K to code for set point dial with serrated edge (not for TM-9150 or TM-9180), e.g. TM-9160-0005-K, TM-9160-0005-WK.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 153
Plastic base for surface mount (grey) Plastic base for surface mount (off-white) Mounting kit for wall box (off-white) Mounting kit for panel mount (off-white) Mounting kit for panel mount (white) Tool for opening module
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 154
24
80
12 C
28
AUTO OFF 1
tmtbdim
Dimensions
Description TC-8900 is a family of analogue controllers, designed for the control of fan coils with 2 pipe, 2 pipe with change-over, 2 pipe with electrical coil, or 4 pipe configurations. The family includes All-in-one Controller Units (TC-8900), a Remote Set point Module (ES8930) and Built-in Controller Units (TC-8930). The TC-8900 has been designed to be easy to use, while integrating the most common room air conditioning control functions. Features All in one condensed package: sensor, direct/reverse input, window input, PI control, up to two valve outputs, mode (comfort/stand-by) push button and setpoint readjustment potentiometer Option to limit the setpoint adjustment range or to cancel the setpoint adjustment Active or passive input Modern and discreet cover which snaps onto a plug-in mounting base Electric terminals located on mounting base Standard range of mounting kits
Wiring Series TC-8900 All-in-one Controller Units Selection Table NTC Sensor Internal External Set point Input 010 V PAT Output 010 V DAT On/Off TC-8903-1131-WK TC-8901-2131-WK Type-Model Number
TC-8904-2131-WK TC-8906-2131-WK TC-8903-1132-WK TC-8901-2132-WK TC-8904-2132-WK TC-8906-2132-WK TC-8903-1151-WK TC-8903-1152-WK TC-8903-1183-WK TC-8901-2183-WK
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 155
Series TC-8900 Local Controllers and ES-8940 Central Setpoint Module Selection Table NTC Sensor Internal External Set point PAT 010 V Output DAT On/Off TC-8943-1141-WK TC-8941-2141-WK Type-Model Number
1 +/- 3K 2 2 2 1228 C
Series TC-8900 All-in-One Controllers and PM-8900 Power Modules Selection Table NTC Sensor Internal External Set point Number Output* Module Number Configuration Type-Model Number TC-8902-1031-WK TC-8907-1031-WK TC-8902-2031-WK TC-8907-2031-WK TC-8902-1032-WK TC-8907-1032-WK TC-8902-2032-WK TC-8907-2032-WK TC-8942-2041-WK TC-8947-2041-WK
Yes
1228 C
Yes
1228 C
Yes
+/- 3K
1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
1, 2 or 3 4 1, 2 or 3 4 1, 2 or 3 4 1, 2 or 3 4 1, 2 or 4 4
2 pipe change over 4 pipe system 2 pipe change over 4 pipe system 4 pipe system
1 2 3 4
010 V and 3 speed ventilator DAT 230V and 3 speed vantilator DAT 24 V and 3 speed ventilator Relais 3A 230 V/24 V and ventilator
TC-8902 and TC-8942 TC-8902 and TC-8942 TC-8902 and TC-8942 TC-8907 and TC-8947
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 156
Electronic Controllers
Description The FX05 is a compact programmable controller specifically designed for single compressor chillers and heat pumps. It includes all the functions usually provided by additional devices such as timers, end-ofdefrost thermostats, etc. Now they all are in a single device and this implies very easy wiring and limited cost of installation. Moreover the controller is fully programmable, thanks to the FX Tools software, and can virtually adapt to any application, provided the right number of inputs and outputs is available. Optionally the FX05 can be fitted with a serial communication card to be compatible with the LONMARK and N2Open worlds. A Real Time Clock card is also available for energy saving and better management of the application. Features LONWORKS and N2Open cards (option) Real Time Clock (option) Freely programmable A99 analogue input Optional converting modules Built-in LED User Interface
FX05 Series
C2 , 3 , 4, 5, 6 DO2 C1 DO1 DO3 DO4 D O5 D O6
Dimensions
N2Open LON
option
Co m NET A RTRT+ AI1 2 4 VAC (+) DI2 DI3 DI4 24 VAC Co m (-) DI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 D I1 DI Com AI Com AO AO Com NET B
FX05-001_10 2002
Typical Wiring FX05 High Performance Controller Selection Table I/0 Ratings Power Supply Protection Class
AnalogOutput (AO) Digital Output (DO) Digital Input (DI)
Application
Type-Model Number
Double isolated between DO1 and the other relay group. Any combination of loads must not exceed 15A in total (the commonspins are internally connected) Max 5A on each common
Application less, Pt1000 LP-FX05P00-000C inputs (object list 000) Temperature monitoring LP-FX05P00-800C application, Pt1000 inputs
LP-FX05P01-000C
Accessories Description
Real Time Clock plug-in card N2Open communication card LON communication card on-field commissioning Input Converter module: active input (4-20 mA) to A99 Input Converter module: active input (ratiometric) to A99 Input Converter module: active input (0-10 V) to A99 Pre-crimped set of cables and female connectors for number 5 FX05 controllers Room Command Module for FX05 (triac + relay version) with +/- 3K setpoint dial, fan speed slide, occupancy button, A99 room sensor. Room Command Module for FX05 with 12-28C setpoint dial and A99 room sensor. Room Command Module for FX05 with 12-28C setpoint dial, A99 room sensor and occupancy button. Condenser fan speed controller single-phase, 3Amps
Type-Model Number LP-RTC05-000C LP-NET051-000C LP-NET052-000C LP-KIT001-000C LP-KIT002-000C LP-KIT004-000C LP-KIT005-000C LP-KIT006-000C LP-KIT006-001C LP-KIT006-002C U215LR-9110
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 157
FX10 Standard Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications.
Electronic Controllers
Description The FX10 is a high performance, programmable controller specifically designed for applications such as Scroll Compressor Chillers and Rooftops, Close Control Units, Indoor Packaged, Unit Vents, Water Source Heat Pump, etc.. The FX10 is a protocol independent controller and can adapt to protocols such as LONMARK and Johnson Controls N2Open. The controller is freely configurable and can adapt to virtually any applications, thanks to its configuration software FX - Tools The controller allows up to 29 I/O in several configuration of triacs / relays, active / passive inputs. Features Protocol independent. LON and N2Open cards (optional) Free programmable A99 NTC K10 Ratiometric Real Time Clock (optional) Choice of connection terminals User Interface (optional)
Dimensions
5 6 55
54 53 52 51 50 49
48 47 46 45 44 43 42
41 40 39
16 .5
1 J7 W1
1 WS1
W2
WV 2 WV 1
22 21
62 1 . 61 1 . 2 7.6 37 1 15 .6
14 .7
54 3 . 1 47 .5 15 7.7
Standard Wiring Diagram FX10 Standard Programmable Electronic Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings Analog Input (Al) Al1, Al2, Al3 A99 Range: -40 to 100C
Accuracy: 0.3C @ 20C ambient (sensor not included) NTC Range: 0 to 100C (K10 or 2K2) Accuracy: 0.5C @ 20C ambient (sensor not included) Ratiometric Range: 0.5 to 4.5 V Resolution: 10 mV A99 Range: -40 to 100C Accuracy: 0.5C @ 20C ambient (sensor error not included)
Configuration
Type-Model Number
LP-FX10B11-000C
DI1,DI2 Voltage free contacts with safety control feature DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6 Voltage free contacts DI7, DI8, DI9, DI10, DI11, DI12 24 VAC external powered contacts Digital Output (DO) SPST 8(3)A, 250VAC relays (low power relay version) or DO1, DO2 SPST 25A, 250VAC relays (high power relay version) DO3, DO4, DO5, SPST 8(3)A, 250VAC relays DO9 DO6 SPST 5(2)A, 250VAC relays SPST 5(2)A, 250Vac relays or DO7, DO8 0.5A / 24VAC triacs Outputs DO3 + DO9 can be freely specified either as relay or as triac. The specific hardware will be created upon minimum order. Other Outputs PWM 9V 9supplied by FX10), 50 mA max, 300 hz Signal to LED of a JC room command module 10 mA at LED 2V
LP-FX10B13-000C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 158
FX10 Standard Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications. (continued)
Electronic Controllers
Accessories Description
Real Time Clock plug-in card N2Open communication card LON communication interface. On-field commissioning LON communication interface. Specific application profile Display Link Interface for display connection (SUI/MUI/LUI) Input Converter 4 - 20 mA to A99 Converter module: PWM to 0 10 V output Input Converter 0 10 V to A99 Pre-crimped set of cables and terminals for Molex connectors (complete set for 2 controllers in each kit) Condenser fan speed controller single-phase, 3Amps Displays Description Large size LCD (4x20) display (LUI with standard JCI front plate) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, panel mount non-isolated version (MUI) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, wall mount isolated version (MUI) Small size LED (3 digits) display, panel mount (SUI)
Type-Model Number LP-RTC10-000C LP-NET101-000C LP-NET102-000C LP-NET102-xxxC LP-KIT000-000C LP-KIT001-000C LP-KIT003-000C LP-KIT004-000C LP-KIT010-000C U215LR-9110 Type-Model Number LP-DIS65P00-0C LP-DIS60P00-0C LP-DIS60P01-0C LP-DIS50P00-0C
Re f r i g e r a t e d w at e r t o t h e pl a n t Fl o w Sw it ch
Fa n 1
Fa n 2
T 1
Fa n 2 Ol p T 2
Ai r Co i l 1 Co n d e n s at o r Ex p d ev Wat e r c o il 1 Ev a po r a t o r T Ex p d ev
Ai r Co i l 2 Co n d e n s ato r
An t if r e e z e H TR 1
An t i f r e e z e H TR 2
Wat e r c o il 2 Ev a po r a t o r
H PS 1
Co m p 1 O LP
Co m p r e s s o r 1 LPS 1
Wat e r Pu m p
Co m p r e s s o r 2 LPS 2
Co m p2 O LP
HPS 2
N
10 6
Re t u r n Wat e r fro m th e pl a n t
D .I. 9 A.I. D. O. 2 7 6
12 6 3
11 1 5 5 4 4
DL, 13/09/01
Example of standard application Air/Water Chiller, 2 compressors/2 cicuits (Application Code: 701FX1001-000BR)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 159
FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications.
Electronic Controllers
Description The FX10 Advanced is a high performance, programmable controller specifically designed for applications such as Scroll Compressor Chillers and Rooftops, Close Control Units, Indoor Packaged, Unit Vents, Water Source Heat Pump, etc.. The FX10 is a protocol independent controller and can adapt to protocols such as LONMARK and Johnson Controls N2Open. The controller is freely configurable and can adapt to virtually any applications, thanks to its configuration software FXTools. The controller allows up to 29 I/Os in the base + 12 I/Os in expansion board with several configuration of triacs / relays, active / passive inputs. Features Protocol independent LON, N2Open and BACnet MSTP communication cards (optional) Free programmable A99 NTC K10, 2K2 Ratiometric 0-10 V Real Time Clock (optional) Expansion board (optional) Choice of connection terminals User Interface
Dimensions
Triac B Os 24 Vac 24 Vac C om D O6 AI1 - EXP 5 Vdc C om 5 Vdc 24 Vac D O5 D O4 24 Vac D O3 A Is AI2 - EXP 5 Vdc C om 5 Vdc AI3 E XP 5 Vdc C om 5 Vdc
A41
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 55 54 53 52 51
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
5 0
49
48 47
4 6
45 44 43 42
41 40
3 9
16 .5
A11 A12 A22 A23 A21 A 33 A32 A42 A43
1 W1
A11
W2
A2 3 A1 3
A21 A12 A1 4
A13
A22
A25
22
A24
21
A31
AI4 E XP 5 Vdc C om
5 Vdc
62
A31
115
1 15 .6
37
37
D O7C om
D O1.2 Com
D O1.2 Com
D O8C om
D O1 NO
D O2 NO
D O7 NO
R elay BOs
14. 7 54. 3 1 4 7.5 15 7 . 7 61. 1 27. 6
95
Wiring Diagram (Main Board) (Expansion Board) FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings Analog Input (Al) Main Board Al1, Al2, Al3 A99 Range: -40 to 100C
NTC (K10, 2k2)
D O8 NO
Configuration
Type-Model Number
Range: 0 100C Accuracy: 0.5C @ 20C ambient (sensor error not included) Range: 0.5 to 4.5 V, Resolution: 10 mV Range: -40 to 100C 0.5C @ 20C ambient (sensor error not included)
N
MOLEX connectors, low LP-FX10B31-002C power relays
Analog Input (Al) Expansion Board Al1, Al2 A99 Range: -40 to 100C
24 V AC/DC 15%, 50/60 Hz
Al3, Al4
0.35C @ 20C ambient (sensor error not included) Range: 0.5 to 4.5 V, Resolution: 10 mV Range: -40 to 100C 0.5C @ 20C ambient (sensor error not included) Range: 0 to 10 V, Resolution 10 mV
Digital Input (Dl) Main Board DI1,DI2 Voltage free contacts with safety control feature MOLEX DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6 Voltage free contacts connectors, 2 LP-FX10B32-002C DI7, DI8, DI9, triacs + low DI10, DI11, DI12 24 VAC external powered contacts power relays Digital Output (DO) Main Board SPST 8(3)A, 250Vac relays (low power relay version) or DO1, DO2 SPST 25A, 250Vac relays (high power relay version) DO3, DO4, DO5, SPST 8(3)A, 250Vac relays WAGO DO9 connectors, low LP-FX10B33-002C DO6 SPST 5(2)A, 250Vac relays power relays SPST 5(2)A, 250Vac relays or DO7, DO8 0.5A / 24Vac triacs Outputs DO3 + DO9 can be freely specified either as relay or as triac. The specific hardware code will be created upon minimum order.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 160
FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller for HVAC and Refrigeration Applications.
Electronic Controllers
FX10 Advanced Programmable Electronic Controller Selection Table (Cont.) Power Supply I/0 Ratings Digital Output (DO) Expansion Board DO1, DO2 SPST 5(2)A, 250Vac relays SPST 8(3)A, 250Vac relays (low power relay version) or DO7, DO8 SPST 25A, 250Vac relays (high power relay version) DO3, DO4, DO5, 0.5A / 24Vac triacs DO6
24 V AC/DC 15%, 50/60 Hz
Configuration
Type-Model Number
Other Outputs Main Board PWM 9V 9supplied by FX10), 50 mA max, 300 hz LED Signal to LED of a JCI room command module 10 mA at 2V Accessories Description Real Time Clock plug-in card N2Open communication card LON communication interface. On-field commissioning LON communication interface. Specific application profile Display Link Interface for display connection (SUI/MUI/LUI) Input Converter 4 - 20 mA to A99 Converter module: PWM to 0 10 V output Input Converter 0 10 V to A99 Pre-crimped set of cables and terminals for Molex connectors (complete set for 2 controllers in each kit) Condenser fan speed controller single-phase, 3Amps Expansion board, 4 relays, 4 triacs, a AI, Molex connectors Expansion board, 4 relays, 4 triacs, a AI, WAGO connectors Displays Description Large size LCD (4x20) display (LUI with standard JCI front plate) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, panel mount non-isolated version (MUI) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, wall mount isolated version (MUI) Small size LED (3 digits) display, panel mount (SUI)
Type-Model Number LP-RTC10-000C LP-NET101-000C LP-NET102-000C LP-NET102-xxxC LP-KIT000-000C LP-KIT001-000C LP-KIT003-000C LP-KIT004-000C LP-KIT010-000C U215LR-9110 LP-XP10B10-000C LP-XP10B11-000C Type-Model Number LP-DIS65P00-0C LP-DIS60P00-0C LP-DIS60P01-0C LP-DIS50P00-0C
Example of Standard Application Air / Water Chiller / HP, 2 compressors / 2 circuits Application Code: 702FX1021-002AR
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 161
FX15 Universal High Performance Controller for Chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc
Electronic Controllers
215 41 37
187
Dimensions
On the controller board V T X 6 E t m m m m m m m / S m u p o o o o o a o a o a mV + a P C o n c a c 7 c 8 2 c a 3 c a 4 c a 5 c 6 i V A n o 9 L L 1 I I I I I I A A 12 3 D I D I D D D I D I D I D I D I D I D D D I D C+ L L D
To Supervisor (Optional) Display / Extension Bus 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Description The FX15 Universal is a high performance controller intended for applications such as chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc The FX15 is a protocol independent controller and can adapt to protocols such as LONMARK, Johnson Controls N2Open. The controller is freely configurable and can adapt to virtually any applications, thanks to the FX-Tools configuration package. The controller allows up to 26 inputs / outputs. Features LON or N2open cards (optional) Freely programmable A99 / NTC k10, 2k2 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V Ratiometric Real Time Clock User Interface, local or remote
122
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
TB5
54
118
TB6
-20T50
TB1
250V ~
TB2
24V ~ 0,5A
TB3
TB4
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
o m n - o L c I A L I F A F
o m n - o 7 c O D 7 O D
o m n - o 6 c O D 6 O D
o m o o m o o m n n n - o - n - o - n - o 1 c 2 3 c 4 5 c O 2 O O - O O 5 D O D D 4 O D D O D D D
m 1 4 O m 2 O m 3 O m O o c A o c A o c A o c A O O O O A A A A
T M O H O C C C A A V V ( Max 1A)
H H T R T R A A E E
M O C C A V
T O H C A V
24V ~
Typical Wiring FX15 High Performance Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings
N
Application Type-Model Number LP-FX15D00-000C
Sensor
JCI Nickel Standard range
JCI Nickel Extended Range Siemens Nickel DIN Nickel
Range
-45,4 to 121,5 C 21 to 287.8 C -50 to 160 C -60 to 180 C -50 to 605 C -20 to 150 C -40 to 150 C -45 to 126 C 10 % to 90% of votage supply
5 triacs + 3 relays
TB5
DIN std Platinum 1000 Ohm NTC 10K NTC 2.2 K A99 0 to 5 VDC ratio-matrix 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 20 mA
LP-FX15D01-000C
3, 8, 13 13
EXT-VDC AVPS
+17 V, 80 mA +5V, 20 mA
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 162
Electronic Controllers
FX05 High Performance Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings Application Type-Model Number
Digital Input (DI) DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6, DI7, DI* FAIL, DO7, DO6 DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4, DO5 AO1, AO2, AO3, AO4
With integratedLCD Display and N2 LP-FX15D51-000C Open card preassembled Voltage free contacts With integratedLCD Display and LON card preassembled
TB6
Digital Output (DO) TB1 TB2 SPST 8(3)A power relays 0.5A / 24 VAC triacs
LP-FX15D52-000C
N2Open communication interface Advanced LON communication interface. On-field commissioning Advanced LON communication interface. Specific application profile Pre-assembled link cable, FX15 to remote LUI/MUI display 3 m Programming key for easy application downloading Condenser fan speed controller single-phase, 3Amps Displays Description Large size LCD (4x20) display (LUI with standard JCI front plate) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, panel mount non-isolated version (MUI) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, wall mount isolated version (MUI) Small size LED (3 digits) display, panel mount (SUI) Expansion Boards Description Extension module DX. Expansion board: 6AI, 2AO. Expansion board: 8DO (triacs). Expansion board: 4DI, 4DO (triacs). Expansion board: 8DI. Expansion board: 4DO (relays).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 163
Electronic Controllers
M
DI4
AI3
DI2
M
AI1 DI3 DI1
+
DI2
AI2
T
DO7
M
AOI
DI6
P
DI5
T
AI6 DO2
M
AO2
M
AO3
DI8
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 164
FX15 Classic High Performance Controller for Chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc
Electronic Controllers
Description The FX15 Classic is a high performance controller intended for applications such as chillers and rooftops, indoor packaged air conditioning units, Air Handling Units, Close Control Units, etc The FX15 is a protocol independent controller and can adapt to protocols such as LON, Johnson Controls N2Open. The controller is freely configurable and can adapt to virtually any applications, thanks to the FX-Tools configuration package. The controller allows up to 27 inputs / outputs with the additional possibility to expand its I/O count through the standard XT/XP modules. Features LON or N2open cards (optional) Freely programmable A99 / NTC k10, 2k2 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V Ratiometric Real Time Clock User Interface, local or remote
DI8 DI V ~ Com 24 V~ DI V ~ Hot
Dimensions
DI2 DI Com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Com LLLL+
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
J1 TB1
Analog Inputs To Supervisor Optional Extension Bus 1 2 3
J2
To Remote Display
JP1
-20T50
!
Digital Outputs
TB3
TB4
TB5
Max 8(3)250V~
TB6
TB7
TB2
Di gi tal Inputs
Analog Outputs
TB8 TB9
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
51 52 53
54 55 56 57
61 62 63
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 91 92 93
Typical Wiring FX05 High Performance Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings Application Type-Model Number
FA IL no
Sensor
JCI Nickel Standard range JCI Nickel Extended Range Siemens Nickel DIN Nickel
Range
-45,4 to 121,5 C 21 to 287.8 C -50 to 160 C -60 to 180 C -50 to 605 C -20 to 150 C -40 to 150 C -45 to 126 C 10 % to 90% of votage supply
5 triacs + 4 relays
LP-FX15D10-000C
TB1
DIN std Platinum 1000 Ohm NTC 10K NTC 2.2 K A99 0 to 5 VDC ratio-matrix 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 20 mA
LP-FX15D11-000C
3, 8 13
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 165
Electronic Controllers
FX05 High Performance Controller Selection Table Power Supply I/0 Ratings Application Type-Model Number
Digital Input (DI) TB2 DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6, Potential free contacts With integratedMUI Display and N2 Open card preassembled With integratedMUI Display and LON card preassembled 9 relais 9 relais and N2 Open card preassembled 9 relais and LON card preassembled 9 relais, with integratedMUI Display 9 relais, with integratedMUI Display and N2 Open card preassembled 9 relais, with integratedMUI Display and LON card preassembled
LP-FX15D61-000C
SPST 8(3)A 250V power relays SPST 5(3)A 250V power relays or 0.5A / 24 VAC triacs SPST 8(3)A 250V power relays
TB5 TB6
Analog Outputs (AO) TB7 TB8 Serial Ports J1 J2 JP1 AO1, AO2, AO3, AO4 010 VDC, 16 bit resolution
LP-FX15D71-000C
Com, LL-, LL+ LL-, LL+, +16V, Com RT+ RT- or NETA Com or NETB
RS485 downlink Extension Bus RS485 downlink + power supply Remote Display Bus Connection to supervisory system, either N2Open or LON
LP-FX15D72-000C
Accessories Description
N2Open communication interface Advanced LON communication interface. On-field commissioning Advanced LON communication interface. Specific application profile Pre-assembled link cable, FX15 to remote LUI/MUI display 3 m Kit of female screw connectors Kit of female cage clamp connectors Programming key for easy application downloading Condenser fan speed controller single-phase, 3Amps Displays Description Large size LCD (4x20) display (LUI with standard JCI front plate) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, panel mount non-isolated version (MUI) Medium size LCD (4x20) display, wall mount isolated version (MUI) for FX15 classic Small size LED (3 digits) display, panel mount (SUI) Expansion Boards Description Extension module DX. Expansion board: 6AI, 2AO. Expansion board: 8DO (triacs). Expansion board: 4DI, 4DO (triacs). Expansion board: 8DI. Expansion board: 4DO (relays).
Type-Model Number LP-NET151-010C LP-NET152-010C LP-NET152-xxxC LP-KIT007-000C LP-KIT015-000C LP-KIT015-001C LP-KIT100-000C U215LR-9110 Type-Model Number LP-DIS65P00-0C LP-DIS60P00-0C LP-DIS60P01-0C LP-DIS50P00-0C Type-Model Number XT-9100-8304 XP-9102-8304 XP-9103-8304 XP-9104-8304 XP-9105-8304 XP-9106-8304
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 166
Electronic Controllers
I/O Code AI1 AI2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 Description Suction Pressure Discharge Pressure Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Alarm stop relative Compressor / Fan Fan / Compressor 1 output Fan / Compressor 2 output Fan / Compressor 3 output Fan / Compressor 4 output Fan / Compressor 5 output Fan / Compressor 6 output Fan / Compressor 7 output Fan / Compressor 8 output Alarm
Example of Standard Application Standard Compressor Rack Application Code: 901FX1500-510AM For more information about this standard application please refer to the related Application Note.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 167
Electronic Controllers
180 45
Description The Large User Interface (LUI) is a local display for the FX10 and FX15 controller series. It is designed for the end user, the operator or the maintenance people who needs a straightforward way to monitor and adjust controller points. Information are presented in a textual format on the 4x20 LCD backlit display. The display can be used as a portable, hand-held unit, or permanently mounted in a panel or on the wall. Features Menu Operations Alarm Summary Password Access Shortcuts to Specific Pages Hardware Customisation Software Customisation
150
LUI Large User Interface LUI Large User Interface Selection Table Power Supply
9 12 Vdc from AC/DC converter or directly powered from the controller for installations up to 3 m.
Dimensions
Protection Class
Hand-held and Wallmounting applications IP30 Panel mount applications IP54
Description
LUI Display, JCI standard front-plate LUI Wall mounting kit 230 VAC,/ 9 VDC converter,isolated 120 VAC / 9 VDC converter, isolated Display Lnk Interface for FX10 3 m, pre-assembled, connection cable for FX15
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 168
Electronic Controllers
Description The Medium User Interface, is a local / remote display for the FX10 and FX15 controllers. It designed for the end user or for the maintenance people who needs a clear and straightforward way to monitor and adjust data. Informations are presented in textual format in the 4x20 backlit LCD display. The display is IP54, it has an extended temperature range: 20C to +50C and can be hand held or permanently mounted on a panel or on a wall. Features Menu operations Alarm summary page Password access Software customisation Universal power supply
MUI Medium User Interface Selection Table Power Supply Protection Class
Hand-held and Wallmounting applications IP30 Panel mount applications IP54
Description
MUI Display, Panel mount version MUI Display, Wall mount isolated version Display Lnk Interface for FX10 (DLI card) 3 m connection cable for FX15
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 169
Electronic Controllers
Description The Small User Interface, is a remote display for the FX10 and FX15 controllers. It designed to provide an easy and cost effective way to monitor and adjust data. Informations are presented in the 3 digit LED display. The display has the standards 32x72 enclosure, it is IP54 and it can be permanently mounted on a panel Features Menu operations Alarm summary page Password access Software customisation
SUI Medium User Interface SUI Medium User Interface Selection Table Power Supply
24 VAC 10%
Protection Class
Panel mount applications IP54
Description
LP-KIT000-000C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 170
70 2.76
75 2.95
MR10 Series
Dimensions
Wiring MR11PM12R-1C
Wiring MR11PM230-1C
Description The MR10 range of controllers has been specifically designed for 'static' or 'ventilated' refrigeration units working at positive or negative temperatures. It incorporates all the features needed by modern units such as compressor and evaporator fan full management, 'off-cycle' or 'active' defrost control. Particular emphasis has been given to the cost, the MR10 offers the basic features for a complete solution maintaining the cost at a very competitive level. Its style has been particularly studied in order to better suit your machine design. Features Attractive Panel mount enclosure Up to 4 relays in a single package Up to 16A thermostat output 230Volt power supply models available Accurate and interchangeable IP 68 sensor Wide range of sensors with various enclosures available SMD technology Keyboard lock Additional features Type-Model Number
MR11 Thermostats for Compressor Management Selection Table Range ( C) Enclosure Power Supply Display Output Rating Protection Class
-40 to +70
Panel
SPST 8(3)A
Wiring MR12PM12R-1C
Wiring MR12PM12R-A1C
Wiring MR12PM230-Z1C
Wiring MR12PM12H-1C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 171
Protection Class
Additional features
Type-Model Number
SPST 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A
Defrost
Alarm
-40 to +70
Panel
12 V AC/DC 3 digits
Wiring MR13PM12R-2C MR14 Thermostats with Defrost and Fan Management Selection Table Range ( C) Enclosure Power Supply Display Output Rating 250 V AC
Compressor
Protection Class
Defrost
Alarm
Fan
SPST 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A
O
MR14PM12R-A2C Overall IP20 Faceplate IP54 Accuracy 1 C Power consumption 2 VA 50/60 Hz MR14PM12R-2C
-40 to +70
Panel
12 V AC/DC 3 digits
SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A
Wiring MR14PM12R-A2C
Wiring MR14PM12R-2C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 172
D A
B1 A
D A
3 N N 1
N 4
4'
3'
230 V~
230V~
230V~
Wiring MR1DR230-1C
MR2DR230-1C
MR12DR230-1C
MR11 Thermostats for Compressor Management Selection Table Range ( C) Enclosure Power Supply Display Output Rating 250 V AC Protecti Additional on features Compressor Alarm Class Type-Model Number MR1DR230-1C
-40 to +70
3 digits
SPST 8(3)A
Open Collector
IP20
Accuracy 1 C
Protection class
For accessories, see Section Accessories MR2 Thermostat for Compressor Management with 'Off Cycle' Defrost Control Selection Table Output Rating 250Vac
Additional Features Compressor Defrost Alarm
SPST 8(3)A
Fan
Range (C)
Enclosure
Power Supply
Pump Down
SPST 8(3)A
Display
Type-Model Number
SPST 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A
-40 to +70
3 digits
SPST 16(6)A
IP 2 0
Accuracy 1C
MR2DR230-1C
MR12DR230-1C
Additional Features
Protection class
MR4 Thermostat with Active Defrost and Fan Management Selection Table Output Rating 250Vac
Compressor Display Defrost Alarm
Fan
Range (C)
Enclosure
Power Supply
Pump Down
Type-Model Number
Accuracy 1C
MR2DR230-1C
SPST 16(6)A
SPST 8(3)A
-40 to +70
IP 20
3 digits
MR12DR230-1C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 173
MR13
1 to 9 K -40C to higher limit lower limit to 70C 0 to 9 min 0 to 99 min 0 to 50C related to setpoint -50 to 0C related to setpoint 1 to 9 K 0 to 99 min 0 = Electric heater 1 = Hot gas 0= by time 1= by temperature 0 to 20C 0 to 99 hours 0 to 99 min 0 to 99 min OFF, 0 to 99 min 0 = Last value before defrost 1 = Set point 1 to 99 min 0= not connected 1= High Level Al. 2= Delayed Alarm 3= door switch 0 to 99 min 0 = Parallel with compressor 1 = Continuous Always OFF during defrost 0 to 99 min. -30 to +5 C
2 -40 70 2 60 10 -10 1 30 0 1 7 6 40 5 OF 0 20 0
Defrost parameters dF Defrost function dE dt di dd dC dU dP Defrost end function Defrost termination temp Defrost interval time Max. defrost duration Dripping time First defrost after power on Display during defrost
dr Delay displayed temp after defrost Digital input parameters iF Digital input function
id Digital input time delay Fan control parameters FF Fan operating function
5 0
Fd
Fan start-up delay after defrost end and power up Fr Fan start-up temperature after defrost end and power up Other parameters SF Thermostat operating function if sensor failure So Un PU Sensor offset Temperature units Display updating time
5 -5
2 0 0 1
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 174
MR40 Series
Dimensions
Wiring MR42PM12R-1C
Wiring MR42PM12R-A1C
MR42 Advanced Thermostats with off cycle Defrost Selection Table Range ( C) Enclosure Power Supply Display Output Rating 250 V AC
Compressor
Protection Class
Defrost
Alarm
SPDT 8(3)A
Fan
MR42PM12R-1C
-40 to +70
Panel
12 V AC/DC 3 digits
SPDT 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 175
MR40 Series Advanced Thermostats for Compressor and Defrost Management (cont.)
Protection Class
Alarm
SPDT 8(3)A
Fan
-40 to +70
Panel
12 V AC/DC 3 digits
MR44 Advanced Thermostats with Defrost and Fan Management Selection Table
SPDT 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A
-40 to +70
Panel
12 V AC/DC 3 digits
Wiring MR43PM12R-2C
Wiring MR44PM12R-A2C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 176
MR40 Series Advanced Thermostats for Compressor and Defrost Management (cont.)
Temperature control parameters Hy Hysteresis LL Lower setpoint limit HL Higher setpoint limit CC Anti short cycling Co Deep freezing time Alarm parameters AH Higher temperature alarm AL Low temperature alarm Ad Alarm differential At Alarm time delay AC Alarm delay after power-up and defrost Defrost parameters
1 to 9 K -40C to 70C -40C to 70C 0 to 9 min 0 to 99 min 0 to 50C -50 to 0C 1 to 9 K 0 to 99 min 0 to 99 min oFF(0) = Off-Cycle ELE(1) = Electric heater HGA(2) = Hot gas 0 = Internal timer 1 = Real Time Clock 0 = by temperature 1 = by time 2 = first occurrence 3 = last occurrence 0 to 20C 0 to 99 hours 0 to 99 min 0 to 99 min oFF, 0 to 99 min 0 = Last value before defrost 1 = Set point 1 to 99 min 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = 8 = 0 to 99 min -10 to +10k Not connected General alarm Delayed alarm Door switch Setpoint bias Defrost start oFF mode AUX output control Fan only mode
dF dn dE dt di dd dC dU dP
Defrost function Defrost initiation mode Defrost end function Defrost termination temp Defrost interval time Max. defrost duration Dripping time First defrost after power on Display during defrost
iF
O
5 3 0
id Digital input time delay ib Set point bias Fan control parameters FF Fan operating function
Fd Fr FS FH
Fan start-up delay after defrost end and power-up Fan start-up temperature after defrost end and after power-up Fan differential Fan hysteresis
0 = Parallel to compressor 1 = Always ON 2 = by temperature Fan always OFF during defrost 0 to 99 min. -30 to +5 C -30 to +5 C 0 to 20 C
5 5 -5 2
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 177
MR40 Series Advanced Thermostats for Compressor and Defrost Management (cont.)
So Un Pd AA
Sensor offset Temperature units Virtual temperature weight Programmable digital output
Add Serial address Real Time Clock parameters HH Hour setting nn Minute setting dAy Day of the week setting
on(1) = Always ON oFF(0)= Always OFF AUt(2) = Automatic -20 to +20 units 0 = C 1 = F 0 to 100 % 0 = alarm 1 = auxiliary 1 to 255 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 0 to 23 0 to 59 on / oFF 0 to 23 0 to 59 Never all days from Monday to Friday Saturdays & Sundays from Monday to Saturday Sundays only
AUt 0 0 0 0 255 0 0 0
Event No. x Hour setting Event No. x Minute setting Event No. x weekday setting
8 0 0
Bias Start Hour Bias Start Minute Bias Status Bias Stop Hour Bias Stop Minute
20 0 oFF 0 0
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 178
75 2.95
MS Series
Dimensions Panel
(+)
(-)
2
230V~ (DIS230) 12V (DIS12)
U
F
B
+
C
12V dc 10mA
0 - 10V
Wiring DISxx MS Display Selection Table Range ( C) Power Supply Enclosure Input
Description This range of versatile controls is intended for single or multistage (2 or 4 stages) applications such as heating, cooling but also humidity or pressure depending on the input type. This range incorporates all control functions as required by modern applications and it exists in both panel mount and DIN rail enclosures. Particular attention has been given to its style in order to better suit your machine design. This complete range of microprocessor based controls offers innovative features and state of the art technology. Features Attractive Panel mount and DIN rail mount enclosure Up to 4 relays in panel mount enclosure 230 Volt power supply models available Accept A99 and 0-10 Volts sensor signal depending on models Power supply to sensors on 0-10 Volts models available from controller Accurate and interchangeable IP 68 sensor Wide range of enclosures for sensors available Keyboard lock SMD technology
A99 sensor (incl.) Panel 0-10 V from humidity sensor (not Incl.)
Output Rating 250 VAC
Input
Alarm Output
Open Collector 40 VDC/ 100mA
Protection Class
-40 to +70
-40 to +100
0-10 V
SPST 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A SPST 16(12)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A
Overall IP20 Front IP54 IP20 Overall IP20 Front IP54 IP20
100mA 40V dc
DIN rail
8(3)A 250V~
100mA 40V dc
8 (3)A 250V~
100mA 40V dc
C
(+ ) (-)
(+ ) (-) (+) (-)
7
+
8
-
B
A99
7
+
8
-
B
A99
7
+
8
-
B
A99
A99
12V~
230V~
12V~
A
+ 0 - 10V
C
12V dc 10mA
B
+
C
12V dc 10mA
(+)
(-)
0 - 10V
230V~
Wiring MS21PM12RT-1C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 179
Range ( C)
Power Supply
Enclosure
Input
stage1
stage2
Alarm Output
Protection Class
Type-Model Number
12 V AC/DC -40 to +70 230 V AC 12 V AC -40 to +100 230 V AC -40 to +70 12-24 V AC/DC 48 VDC
SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A
SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPST 8(3)A SPDT 8(3)A
IP20
8(3)A 250V~
12V dc 10mA +
0 - 10V
A99
12/24/48V
C
(+) (-)
A B1
B
A99
A99
8(3)A 250V~
d
B A D A 8 7
8 7 6 5 4 3
12V~
A
+ 0 - 10V
C
12V dc 10mA
(+) (-)
d
1 2 5 4
230V~
c
Wiring MS2DR48DT-1C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 180
Range ( C)
Power Supply
Enclosure
Input
Protection Class
Type-Model Number
DIN rail
SPST SPST
SPST
12 V AC/DC
Panel
A99 sensor (incl.)
SPST SPST
SPST
40 VDC/ 100mA
MS4PM12RT-1C MS4DR230T-1C
Panel
SPDT SPDT
SPDT
IP20
MS4DR48T-1C
A99
12/24/48V
d
8 6 7
d
B1 A D A B2 8 7
(+)
(-)
B1
8(3)A 250V~
10 13
D B2 A
B1
A99
c d e f
12V~
13 12
11 10
(+)
(-)
c
Wiring MS4PM12RT-1C
14 13
11 10
230V~
Wiring MS4DR230T-1C
Wiring MS4DR48T-1C
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 181
H1 S2 H2 S3 H3 S4 H4 LL HL CC CH rt AH AL Ad At Lc Uc nc So Un PU iF
Hysteresis (HY) Setpoint 2 Hysteresis (HY) Setpoint 3 Hysteresis (HY) Setpoint 4 Hysteresis (HY) Lower setpoint limit (LL) Higher setpoint limit (HL) Anti short cycling cooling (CC) Anti short cycling heating (CH) Soft start High. temperature alarm Low temperature alarm Alarm differential Alarm time delay Non compensated band Heating compensation Cooling compensation Sensor offset Temperature units Display updating time delay Digital input function
1 to 9 K Direct/Reverse = 1 to 40 units Deadband = 2 to 40 units Indip. setpoint = Low to high limit 1 to 9 K 1 to 40 units 1 to 9 K 1 to 40 units 1 to 9 K -40C to higher limit lower limit to 125 units 0 to 9 min 0 to 99 min 0 to 99 min / units 0 to 50 units related to setpoint -50 to 0 units related to setpoint 1 to 9 units 0 to 99 min 0 to 20 K 0 to 6 K/K 0 to 6 K/K -20 to +20 units 0 = Celsius degrees 1 = Fahrenheit degrees 1 to 99 sec 0 = Not used 1 = Shut off and alarm signalling 2 = Stand by mode 3 = Remote switch off 0 to 20 units 0 to 99 sec 3 to 99 sec -40 to high range Low range to 100
Alarm parameters
Temperature parameters
Other parameters
O
40 5 20 20 20
Sb Id IS Lr Hr
Stand-by bias Digital input time delay Interstage delay Low range analog input 1 High range analog input 1
* When there are 2 setpoints (MS2 or MS4 is configured for independent setpoint mode), the low alarm is linked to the lowest setpoint and the high alarm is linked to the highest setpoint.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 182
CR Series
12 modules 18 modules
A 164 269
B 275 380
Positive temperature cold room cabinets Selection Table Cabinet Size Modules Power supply V ac
Type-Model Number
O
CR-PS037-1 CR-PS075-1 CR-PS110-1 CR-PS150-1 CR-PT150-1 CR-PT250-1 CR-PT400-1 CR-PT550-1 CR-PT750-1
12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18
1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 183
CR Series
12 modules 18 modules
A 164 269
B 275 380
Amb ie nt Se nsor
Contact A99 A 99
Evaporator Se nsor
pump down B1 A D A B2 A 1 3N 11 10
CB1
Cir cu it Breaker 1P+N
2 4N
MR15DR230
7L4
K1
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3
N N 13 N 7 N 4 N 4 3
N 21 22
20
D efrost 2 30 V ~
Negative temperature cold room cabinets Selection Table Cabinet Size Modules Power supply V ac
Type-Model Number CR-NS037-1 CR-NS075-1 CR-NS110-1 CR-NS150-1 CR-NT150-1 CR-NT250-1 CR-NT400-1 CR-NT550-1 CR-NT750-1
12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18
1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3
8 12 12 16 12 12 15 15 15
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 184
CR Series
24 modules
A 164
B 275
Am bient Sensor
E vaporator S ensor
Contact
A99
A99
1/ 2 3/ 4 5/6 7/8
pum p down B1 A D A B2 A 1 3N 11 10
CB1
Circuit Breaker 1P+N
7L4 2 4N
MR15DR230
K2
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
K1
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3
Compresso r Contactor
8T4
N N 13 N 7 N 4 N 4 3
23 22
24
21
Negative temperature cold room three phase Compressor and three phase Defrost models Negative temperature cold room with three fase defrost Selection Table Cabinet Size Modules Power supply V ac
Defrost Amps
O
Type-Model Number CR-NDT150-1 CR-NDT250-1 CR-NDT400-1 CR-NDT550-1 CR-NDT750-1
24 24 24 24 24
3 3 3 3 3
3x5 3x9 3 x 10 3 x 12 3 x 16
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 185
CR Series Negative Temperature Cold Room Cabinets with Three Phase Defrost and Evapoator Fan Control
CR Series
36 modules
A -
B 380
Ambient Sensor
7L4 1L1 3L2 5L3
Q1
Main Switch
1L1 3L2 5L3
K2
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 7L4 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
pump down
B1 A D A B2 A 11 10
CB1
MR15DR230
K1
A2
K3
F an Co ntact or
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
Defrost Contacto r
N N 13 N 7 N 4 N 4 3
8T4
Def ro st 230 V 3~
F1
Alarm 2 30 V~ 0 ,5 A Valve Pu mp do wn
24
F an 3 ~ 400 Vo lts
Negative temperature cold room- three phase Compressor, Defrost and Evaporator Fan Negative temperature cold room cabinets with three phase defrost and evaporator fan Selection Table Cabinet Size Modules Power supply V ac
36 36 36
3 3 3
3 3 3
3x5 3 x 10 3 x 16
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 186
Setpoint Hysteresis (HY) Lower setpoint limit (LL) Higher setpoint limit (HL) Anti short cycling (CC) Deep freezing time (Co) High. temperature alarm Low temperature alarm Alarm differential Alarm time delay Defrost function Defrost end function Defrost termination temp Defrost interval time Max. defrost duration Dripping time First defrost after power on Display during defrost Delay displayed temp after defrost Digital input function
-40 to 70C 1 to 9 K -40C to higher limit lower limit to 70C 0 to 9 min 0 to 99 min 0 to 50C related to setpoint -50 to 0C related to setpoint 1 to 9 K 0 to 99 min 0 = Electric heater 1 = Hot gas 0= by time 1= by temperature 0 to 20C 0 to 99 hours 0 to 99 min 0 to 99 min OFF, 0 to 99 min 0 = Last value before defrost 1 = Set point 1 to 99 min 0 = Instrument OFF 1 = Alarm signalling 2 = Alarm reset 3 = Alarm reset and fan cut- off 0 to 99 sec 0 = Parallel with compressor 1 = Continuous running 0 to 99 min. -30 to +5 C/-22 to 41F
2 -40 70 2 60 10 -10 1 30 0 1 7 12 40 5 OF 0 20 0
Digital input time delay Fan operating function Fan start-up delay after defrost end and power up Fan start-up temperature after defrost end and power up Thermostat operating function when sensor failure Offset thermostat sensor Temperature units Display updating time delay
5 0 5 2
So Un PU
0 0 1
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 187
System 27 NOVA
Sensor
Sensor
Dimensions
Wiring Two-stage
Description System 27 NOVA is a family of modern modular electronic modules designed for a wide variety of control configurations in refrigeration, heating, ventilation, airconditioning and other related fields. The modular concept was specially designed to make control configuration easier and still offer the flexibility necessary to answer the many individual control requirements encountered today. The temperature control modules can be used as a stand alone device or together with other modules, such as, stage modules, display modules, time switch modules, etc., to achieve a diverse number of single or multistage applications. Features Modular design Plug-in quick connector wiring system Adjustable differential and heating/cooling setting Wide range of enclosures for sensing elements Attractive DIN-rail mount housing Setpoint shift output function Application Typical applications are: refrigerated/freezer display cases beverage coolers liquid chillers cold-room storage.
118
One-stage Thermostat, without Sensor Selection Table Setpoint range (C) Supply voltage (-15/+10 %) 50/60 Hz Additional Features Type-Model Number A27A1N11 A27A1N12 A27A2N11 A27A2N12 A27A2N14 A27A2N15
Mode Output Switch action Differential Power consumption Input signal Enclosure
45 83
: Field adjustable : SPDT contact 10(5)A 250 V ac : Automatic reset : 0,5 to 15 K : 230 V ac models:4 VA 24V ac/dc models:2 VA : from A99 temp.sensor : DIN RAIL mount (35 mm), IP20
-40 to +40 10 to 100 -40 to +40 10 to 100 -20 to +60 20 to 60 -20 to +20
Mode Output Switch action Input signal Enclosure Differential Delta setpoint Power consumption
: Field adjustable : two SPDT contacts 10(5)A 250 V ac : Automatic reset : from A99*-91** temp.sensor : DIN RAIL mount (35 mm), IP20 : 0,5 to 5 K : 0,5 to 5 K : 230 V ac models:4,5 VA 24 V ac/dc models: 3 VA
0 to 10
230 V ac
: 0.5 to 10 K : SPDT contact 10(5)A 250 V ac : from A99x-91xx Temperature sensor : 230 V ac Models:4 VA 24 V ac/dc Models:2 VA
A27D2N11
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 188
D27 Panel mount Dimensions Panel mount Display Modules Selection Table Range Supply voltage (-10/+10 %) 50 /60Hz Additional features
48
Wiring diagram
Type-Model Number
D27AF-9100
Wiring Diagram Panel mount Display/Selector Modules Selection Table Range Supply voltage (-10/+10 %) 50 /60Hz Additional features Type-Model Number
-40 to +99 C
230 V ac
These display to selectors can accept up to 6 sensor Power consumption : 230 V ac models: 3 VA Enclosure : panel mount (48x96 mm), IP20 Noryl Input : A99x-91xx temperatuur sensor
D27AG -9100
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 189
System 27 NOVA
Dimensions
Brown
Brown
Green
Green
White
White
Sensor
Sensor
Wiring One -stage One-stage Humidistat Selection Table Setpoint range Supply voltage (-15/+10 %) 50/60 Hz Additional Features
Description System 27 NOVA is a family of modern modular electronic modules designed for a wide variety of control configurations in refrigeration, heating, ventilation, airconditioning and other related fields. The modular concept was specially designed to make control configuration easier and still offer the flexibility necessary to answer the many individual control requirements encountered today. The humidity control modules can be used as a stand alone device or in conjunction with other modules such as display modules, signal converter modules etc. to achieve a wide variety of single or multiple stage applications. Features Modular design Plug-in quick connector wiring system Adjustable differential and humidification/dehumidification setting Interchangeable humidity transmitters with different housings Attractive DIN-rail mount housing Setpoint shift output function Application Typical applications are: computer rooms; clean rooms; fruit storage/ripening; food processing; industrial processes.
118
45 83
Type-Model Number
24 V ac/dc
10 to 100 % R.H.
230 V ac
Mode: Output: Input signal: Enclosure: Differential: Delta setpoint: Power consumption:
Field adjustable SPDT contacts 10(5)A 250 V ac Room HT-9000 humidity sensor DIN RAIL mount (35 mm), IP20 2 to 10 % R.H. 0 to 30 % R.H. 230 V ac models: 4,5 VA 24 V ac/dc models: 3 VA
W27N11
W27N21
Two-stage Humidistat Selection Table Setpoint range Supply voltage (-15/+10 %) 50/60 Hz Additional Features Type-Model Number
24 V ac/dc
10 to 100 % R.H.
230 V ac
Mode: Output: Input signal: Enclosure: Differential: Delta setpoint: Power consumption:
Field adjustable Two SPDT contacts 10(5)A 250 V ac Room HT-9000 humidity sensor DIN RAIL mount (35 mm), IP20 2 to 10 % R.H. 0 to 30 % R.H. 230 V ac models: 4,5 VA 24 V ac/dc models: 3 VA
W27N12
W27N22
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 190
Sens or
118
45 83
Temperature
System 27 NOVA Display Module Display Modules Selection Table Dimensions Wiring
Pressure /Humidity
Quick connector
Additional Features
Type-Model Number
D27A1N1
no 230 V ac included
field adjustable, from other System 27 NOVA control modules DIN RAIL mount (35 mm), IP20 10 (5) A 250V ac 230 V ac models: 4,5 VA 24V ac/dc models: 3 VA
118
Green
White
70
53 32
S enso r
O
System 27 NOVA Dimensions Stage Modules Stage Modules Selection Table Number of outputs Supply voltage (-15/+10 %) 50/60 Hz Differential (K) Wiring
Additional Features
2 x SPDT
Can be connected only to 1-stage or 2-stage thermostats. Setpoint stage module is related to setpoint thermostat Delta setpoint range: 0,5 to 15 K Max. number of stages connected to a thermostat: 4 Can be connected only to 1-stage or 2-stage thermostats. Setpoint stage module is independent to setpoint thermostat. Can be connected only to 1-stage or 2-stage pressure switch. Setpoint stage module is related to setpoint pressure switch Delta setpoint range: 0 to 4 bar Max. number of stages connected to a pressure switch: 4
S27P2
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 191
This converter can be used to transfer an input signal (or part of an input signal) to an output signal of 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 V
System 27 NOVA Dimensions Signal Converter Signal Converter Selection Table Supply voltage (-10/+10 %) 50/60 Hz Setpoint Range
Wiring
24 V ac 230 Vac
-50/+100 C
Voltage
2 / 200 C
Voltage
DIN rail mount voltage output Rmin = 1k Ohm current output Rmax = 500 Ohm 230 V ac models: 2 VA 24 V ac/dc models: 1 VA
Y27L2
24 V ac 230 Vac
0 to 10 V
1 to 10 V
Staging Relay Selection Table Supply voltage (-10/+15 %) 50/60 Hz Additional Features
24 V ac 230 Vac
Input signal: Setpoint range: Differential range: Mode: Enclosure: Output: Power consumption; Time delay:
0 to 10Vdc 5 to 95% (0,5 to 9,5Vdc) 5 to 60% (0,5 to 6Vdc) Automatic reset field adjustable DIN RAIL mount (35 mm) Two SPDT contacts 10(5)A 250 V ac 230 V ac models: 4,5 VA Stage 1: 1 second Stage 2: 2 seconds
SR-9100-1 SR-9100-2
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 192
Dimensions
~
Alarm
Sensor
0 ~
Wiring
Description This electronic controller is designed to control the cooling and agitation of direct expansion milkcooltanks. The combination of microcomputer based electronics and a durable, IP54, splashproof enclosure, makes this instrument excellent suited for harsh environments. The front is easy to clean due to the absence of protruding parts and its IP68 protection class. The program selection possibilities and set up mode makes this instrument versatile and suited for almost every milktank application. Features Microcomputer based electronics. Splashproof IP54 enclosure. IP68 frontplate (without protruding parts) A selection of 5 control programs. Defect sensor detection. "Set up" mode. LED indication for status output relays and selected program. Digital alarm input Defect sensor detection
R78 Controller for cooling and agitation of direct expansion milkcooltanks Selection Table Supply voltage (V ac) -15/+10% Output relays Aditional Features A99B-9100 temperature sensor included. "Set up" mode, Digital alarm input, Selection possibility for 5 programs Type-Model Number R78RAD-9100 R78CS-900x
230
2 x SPST 1800 VA
Wall mount IP54 splashproof enclosure Special OEM model for build in applications. Please contact Johnson Controls Nederland B.V. !
125
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 193
P215DP/SH/ST
Dimensions
P215DP
L1
N1 N2
L2
3
L1 N1 N2 L2 1 2 3 HP
!
(one earth pole) max. 6 Amp slow
L N
Hp2
Heat Pump Hp1
Note
Three earth connections are provided except for 22-42 bar models which have two earth connections.
Hp
Note Three earth connections are provided except for 22-24 bar models which have two earth connections
M 1~
1 2
M 1~
P35AC
No other connections are allowed within this area. The Hp2 contact must be a separate contact of the Heatpump relay
Description These controllers are designed for speed variation of single phase motors, especially for fan speed control on air cooled condensers. Head pressure control of a refrigeration system, through speed variation of the fan on an air-cooled condenser, results in optimum performance throughout the year. Using a pressure transducer as the input device to the fan speed controller, gives the most direct and fastest response to pressure variations in the refrigerant system. The controller varies the supply voltage to the motor from 45 % to at least 95 % over the proportional band using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. The controller used for dual pressure input varies the fan speed by directly sensing the pressure changes of two separate refrigerant circuits. The setpoint of each pressure transducer can be separately adjusted. The controller selects the input with the greatest cooling demand to control the fan speed. The transducers can be used in non-corrosive refrigerant systems. Features Condenser pressure control by fan speed variation. Pressure input. Transducers with proven reliability. Easy accessible setpoint screw. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off selection. Dual input possibility (P215DP only) Heatpump input available (P215SH) IP54 enclosure.
Wiring (Second Input only for P215DP) Wiring (Heatpump input P215SH only) P215 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Range (bar) Prop. band (bar) Setpoint (bar) Pressure Connection Supply voltage 50/60 Hz Rating Additional features Note: Style 50 is allowed on the Type-Model Number Dutch market ! P215DP-9100 P215DP-9101 P215DP-9600 P215DP-9601 P215DP-9800 P215DP-9102 P215SH-9100 P215SH-9101 P215SH-9102 P215SH-9800 P215ST-9100 P215ST-9101 P215ST-9600 P215ST-9601 P215ST-9102
14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 22 to 42 14 to 24 8 to 14 22 to 42 14 to 24 14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 8 to 14 22 to 42
16 10 16 10 16 30 16 10 30 16 16 10 16 10 30
90 cm cap. st. 50 90 cm cap. st. 51 Braze con. st. 28 90 cm cap. st. 50 90 cm cap. st. 50 Braze con. st. 28 90 cm cap. st. 50 6 Amp 90 cm cap. st. 51 90 cm cap. st. 50 For use on R410A applications Single input 230 V ac 8 Amp Single/dual input. For dual input a second separate transducer has to be ordered ! For use on R410A applications Single input 4 Amp For use on R410A applications Single input
For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
125 100
Page 194
P215LR/BR/TR
P35AC
Dimensions
P35AC
P35AC
1 3 2
P35AC
1 3 2
P35AC
1 2
1 2
3 2 P35AC
2m
2m
3 2 P35AC
Hp2
1
A1 A2 A3
3 2
HP
A1
A2
A3
C1 C 2 B1 B2 A1 A2 A3 B3 C3
L1 L2 M1 M2
P215TR
!
(one earth pole) max. 6 Amp slow L Heat Pump Hp1
N1
L1
N2
L2
N1 L1 N2 L2 N L
6 Amp
!
Hp
M 1~
M 1~
M 1~
No other connections are allowed within this area. The Hp2 contact must be a separate contact of the Heatpump relay.
Description The P215LR is a single pressure input, the P215BR is a dual pressure input and the P215TR is a triple pressure input fan speed controller for air cooled condensers with respectively single, dual and triple refrigerant circuits. The controller varies the fan speed by directly sensing the pressure changes of one, two or three separate refrigerant circuits. The setpoint of each pressure transducer can be separately adjusted. The controller selects the input with the greatest cooling demand to control the fan speed. The controllers can be used in non corrosive refrigerant systems and vary the supply voltage to the motor from 45 % to 95% of the supplied voltage using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. If the pressure drops below the adjusted setpoint minus the proportional band, the output to the motor is zero volt or the adjusted min. speed setting. Features Condenser pressure control by fan speed variation. Pressure input. Model with heatpump input available Transducers with proven reliability. Easy accessible setpoint screw. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off selection. (only on LR and BR models) Motor speed action can be reversed by interchanging only two wires. Dual pressure input (BR models). Triple pressure input (TR models) Small dimensions. DIN rail mounted
118
Wiring P215LR/BR 230 V P215LR 400 V P215TR P215 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Prop. Setpoint Supply Additional features Range Pressure band voltage Rating Note: Style 50 is allowed on Type-Model (bar) (bar) Connection/Style Number (bar) 50/60 Hz the Dutch market !
14 to 24 4 16 90 cm cap. / 50 8 to 14 2.5 10 Bulk pack version of type P215LR-9110 (15 pcs) Minimum speed adjustable 14 to 24 4 16 direct mount / 47 Single pressure input 8 to 14 2.5 10 direct mount / 47 14 to 24 4 16 direct mount / 51 8 to 14 2.5 10 22 to 42 6 30 For R410A applications 14 to 24 4 16 230 V heatpump input 90 cm cap. / 50 14 to 24 4 16 400V version 14 to 24 4 16 8 to 14 2.5 10 Minimum speed adjustable Dual pressure input 14 to 24 4 16 direct mount / 47 8 to 14 2.5 10 14 to 24 4 16 90 cm cap. / 50 8 to 14 2.5 10 Tripple pressure input 14 to 24 4 16 direct mount / 47 8 to 14 2.5 10 For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements * Quantity orders only
230 VAC 3 Amp
45 83
P215LR -9110 P215LR -9111 P215LR -9130* P215LR -9210 P215LR -9211 P215LR -9610 P215LR -9611 P215LR -9114 P215LR -9140 P215LR -9120 P215BR -9110 P215BR -9111 P215BR -9210 P215BR -9211 P215TR -9110 P215TR -9111 P215TR -9210 P215TR -9211
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 195
P15CS
Dimensions
P15CS9XXX FAN N L M
Description The P15CS is a single pressure input fan speed controller for air cooled condensers. The controller varies the fan speed by directly sensing the pressure changes in the refrigerant circuits. The controllers can be used in non corrosive refrigerant systems and vary the supply voltage to the motor using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. If the pressure drops below the adjusted setpoint minus the proportional band, the output to the motor is zero volt or the adjusted min. speed setting. Features Condenser pressure control by fan speed variation. Pressure input. Transducers with proven reliability. Easy accessible setpoint screw. Small dimensions.
N L
Wiring P15CS Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Additional features Rating Note: Style 50 is allowed on the Dutch market ! 90 cm shielded cable, 45% cut-off and Pb of 4 bar 90 cm cap. / 45A 60 cm shielded cable, 35% cut-off and Pb of 3.5 bar 14 to 24 16 90 cm shielded cable, 45% cut-off and 90 cm cap. / 50 Pb of 4 bar 90 cm shielded cable, 45% cut-off and 90 cm cap. / 34 Pb of 4 bar (Bracket incl.) 90 cm shielded cable, 45% cut-off and 22 to 42 30 90 cm cap. / 50 Pb of 5 bar. For R410A applications For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements * Quantity orders only Range (bar) Setpoint (bar) Pressure Connection/Style
230 VAC 1 Amp
26
56 37
Supply voltage 50 Hz
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 196
U215LR
N L N L
(one ea rthing p ole )
MN ML
+
A B I
A B
M. 1~
1 mm2- 2.5 mm 2 N L
N
6 Amp MN ML
U215LR
70 12 53 32
4-20 mA
U215LR
N L
M N M L
+
A B I
! M 1~
N L
M. 1~
Dimensions
Wiring U215
Wiring U215PWM
Description These controls can be used to modulate the fan speed in response to the demand of a control system in ventilation applications and VAV systems. A 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal coming from a (e.g. temperature/ pressure/ humidity/ flow) control loop is used as input while the U215 fan speed controller acts like an actuator. The controller modulates the speed of single phase permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole motors which do not draw more than 3 A (rms) full load current. The device varies the supply voltage to the motor from 45 % to 95 % of the supplied voltage using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. Features Built-in suppression filter. Input galvanically separated from high voltage part. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off selection. Input selection 0-10 V or 4-20 mA. Small dimensions. DIN rail mounted
118
U215LR Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Range (selectable) Supply voltage Additional features (230 VAC) Note: Style 50 is allowed on the Dutch market ! 50/60 Hz Type-Model Number U215LR -9110 U215LR-PWM11
45 83
3 Amp rating
Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off selectable Impedance 1,5 kOhm, Voltage range 5V to 20V, Frequency range 10Hz to 1 kHz
For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements * Quantity orders only
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 197
56
Dimensions
A B0 B1 C D E F
U V W
R S T
U1 V 1 W1
Off
Max.
3~
Description These controllers are designed for applications where the fan speed must be controlled by a temperature sensor input signal . The controller varies the supply voltage to the motor from 30 % to at least 96 % over the proportional band using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. Motors that will be controlled by the A255 should not draw more than 5 A per phase. Features Various temperature sensor enclosures to match many applications. Allows connection in both Star and Delta configurations. Contact input to force output to max. or off. Built-in direct/reverse action selector switch. IP54 enclosure. Built-in set point adjustment. Minimum speed or cut-off selection. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off. Adjustable maximum speed limit. Proportional band adjustment. Adjustable hysteresis in cut-off mode. Cos motor adjustment.
Wiring A255 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Range (C) Prop. band (K) Supply voltage (V ac) 50/60 Hz 3 phase Switch Rating Additional features Type-Model Number A255MM-9100 A255ML-9100
0 to 65
1 to 10
400 230
5A
For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 198
P255 Single/Dual Input Pressure Actuated Fan Speed Controllers for 3-phase Motors
56
P255
Dimensions
A B0 B1 C D E F
U V W
R S T
P35AC
1 2 3 1 2 3 Off Max.
U1 V1 W1
3~
Description These controllers are designed for speed variation of 3-phase motors, especially for fan speed control on air cooled condensers. Head pressure control of a refrigeration system, through speed variation of the fan, results in optimum performance throughout the year. Using a pressure transducer as the input device, gives the most direct and fastest response to pressure variations in the refrigerant system. The controller varies the supply voltage to the motor from 30% to at least 96% over the proportional band using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. Motors that will be controlled by the P255 should not draw more than 5 A per phase. The controller used for dual pressure input varies the fan speed by directly sensing the pressure changes of two separate refrigerant circuits. Each pressure transducer can be adjusted at a setpoint between 8 to 42 bar. The controller selects the input with the greatest cooling demand. The transducers can be used in non-corrosive refrigerant systems. Features Condenser pressure control by fan speed variation. Pressure input. Dual input possibility. Transducers with proven reliability. Easy accessible setpoint screw. Minimum speed or cut-off selection. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off. Adjustable maximum speed limit. Proportional band adjustment. Contact input to force output to max. or off. Allows connection in both Star and Delta configurations. Motor speed action can be reversed by interchanging only two wires. Adjustable hysteresis in cut-off mode. IP54 enclosure for electronic module. Cos motor adjustment.
Wiring P255 P255 Pressure Actuated Single Phase Fan Speed Controllers Selection Table Range (bar) Supply voltage Prop. band Pressure (VAC) (bar) Connection 50/60 Hz 3 phase 1 to 6 style 47 230 1 to 6 style 45A 0.5 to 4 1 to 6 style 47 0.5 to 4 1 to 6 400 style 13 0.5 to 4 1 to 6 0.5 to 4 style 50 0.5 to 4 1 to 8
Rating
P35AC
Type-Model Number P255ML -9200 P255MM -9100 P255MM -9101 P255MM -9200 P255MM -9201 P255MM -9600 P255MM -9601 P255MM -9500 P255MM -9501 P255MM -9502 P255MM -9503
14 to 24 14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 8 to 14 14 to 24 8 to 14 3.5 to 10 22 to 42
16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 6 30
Direct mount sensor Direct mount sensor Direct mount sensor Same as P255MM-9100 but Style 50 Same as P255MM-9101 but Style 50 For use on R410A applications
For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
5 Amp
Page 199
56
P255
Dimensions
Description These controllers are designed for applications where the fan speed must be controlled by a voltage input signal (e.g. 0-10V, 1-5V etc.) from a transmitter or control system. The signal from one pressure transmitter connected to electronic pressostats, indicators and fan speed control eliminates pressure connections and capillaries through which possible loss of refrigerant is reduced. Head pressure control of a refrigeration system, through speed variation of the fan on an aircooled condenser, results in optimum performance throughout the year. The controller varies the supply voltage to the motor from 30% to at least 96% over the proportional band using the phase cutting principle. It is recommended to confirm with the electric motor manufacturer if a controller using the phase cutting principle for speed variation can be used. Motors that will be controlled by the U255 should not draw more than 5 A per phase. Features Adjustable voltage input. Allows connection in both Star and Delta configurations. Contact input to force output to max. or off. Built-in power supply. Built-in direct/reverse action selector switch. IP54 enclosure. Built-in set point adjustment. Minimum speed or cut-off selection. Adjustable minimum speed or cut-off Adjustable maximum speed limit. Proportional band adjustment. Adjustable hysteresis in cut-off mode. Cos motor adjustment.
Rating
Range
Prop. band
Type-Model Number
0 - 10 V
0.7-10 V
230 V
For accessories, see Section Accessories. For replacement parts see Section Replacements
5 Amp
0 - 10 V
0.7-10 V
400 V
Can also be used for 0-5 V, 1-5 V input or other inputs within the U255MM -9100 range 0-10 V. Can also be used for 0-5 V, 1-5 V input or other inputs within the U255ML -9100 range 0-10 V.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 200
19
26
56 37
P35AC
Dimensions
Replacement Press. transducers for P215 versions (300K ohm) Range Setting (bar) Style Cap. Length (m) Additional features Note: Style 50 is allowed on the Dutch market ! Type-Model Number P35AC -9100
14/24 8/14 3.5/10 14/24 8/14 14/24 8/14 14/24 22/42 14/24 8/14 14/24 8/14 14/24 8/14 14/24 8/14 14/24 22/42
16 10 7 16 10 16 10 16 30 16 10 16 10 10 16 10 16 10 16 30 18 16 30
45A
47 50 51 50 13 0.9 Same as P35AC-9100 but Style 50 Same as P35AC-9101 but Style 50 Same as P35AC-9100 but Style 51 For R410A applications (also used for replacement P15/P215 series fan speed controllers)
P35AC -9500 P35AC -9501 P35AC -9507 P35AC -9512 P35AC -9600 P35AC -9601 P35AC -9200 P35AC -9201 P35AC -9105 P35AC -9106
47 45A 13 0.9 Same as P35AC-9105 but Style 50 Same as P35AC-9106 but Style 50 For R410A applications Special 500 KOhm for Carrier CS-LEE90/95-controllers Special 500 KOhm for P215LR-400V. version Special 500 KOhm version for R410A applications
P35AC -9603 P35AC -9604 P35AC -9505 P35AC -9506 P35AC -9511 P35AC-9104 P35AC-9510 P35AC-9513
50
14/24 22/40
50
0.9
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 201
Replacement electronic module P215LR-230 V Replacement electronic module P215LR-230 V Replacement electronic module P215BR-230 V Replacement electronic module P215TR-230 V Replacement electronic module P255MM Replacement electronic module P255ML
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 202
Dimensions DX-9100-8154
Dimensions DX-9100-8454
For wiring we suggest that you order the Technical Data Sheet
DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Selection Table Analog Inputs Binary Inputs Analog Outputs Binary Outputs Supply Voltage Communication Bus N2 LonWorks Type-Model Number DX-9100-8154 DX-9100-8454
8 8 8 8
Jumper Selectable RTD(1K NI) 0-10 VDC Transmitter 0-20 mA Transmitter (4 max.)
8 8 8 8
2 8 8 8
Jumper Selectable 0-10 VDC 0-20 mA (4)
6 6 6 6
24 VAC Triacs at 0.5 amps
N2-Bus 24 VAC 10%, 50/60Hz Room and light control Airhandling control
DX-9200-8454-A DX-9200-8454-D
Dry Contacts
Note:
Refer to DX-9200 Technical Bulletin for details of the LonWorks network interface specifications. LonWorks is a Registered Trade Mark of Echelon Corp.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 203
Type-Model Number
Description
Terminal covers wall mounting base Wall Mounting Base Panel Mounting Base Cabinet Door Mounting Frame Access protection key Lithium Battery Graphics configuration software WinGX-9100
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 204
For wiring we suggest that you order the Technical Data Sheet
Extension Module for XP module connection to DX module 6 2 4 8 4 XTM-905/XPx Modules Selection Table
Analog Inputs 0-10V, 0/4-20 mA, Ni 1000, Pt1000, A99 Binary Inputs Analog Outputs 0-10V, 0-20 mA
8 4 -
None
Type-Model Number XTM-905-5 XPA-421-5 XPA-442-5 XPA-821-5 XPB-821-5 XPM-401-5 XPL-401-5 XPE-401-5 XPE-404-5 XPT-401-5 XPT-861-5
Extension Module for XPx expansion modules connection to DX module 4 4 6 2 8 4 2 (moment) 4 3 (latching) 4 3 (electric) 4 4 (electric) 4 4 8
Accessories (order separately)
option
none
Description
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 205
METAS YS
META SYS
Cover Tabs
DIN Rail
122 m m/ 4.8"
ser vice power
DIN Rail
144 mm/5.7"
38 3 mm/ 1.5"
tcu2dimf
144 mm/5.7"
51 mm/ 2.1"
tcu2dim
Dimensions 24 VAC
Wiring AD-TCU1205-xxxx (for other models please consult Technical Bulletin) TCU Fan Coil Unit Controller Selection Table Output Configuration Application Power Supply Output 1 Ordering Code Output 2 Output 3 (2xTriac) (Analog or 2xTriac) (Relay) Triac 1: not used Analog 0 - 10 VDC AD-TCU1215-0AxA On/Off Fan *AD-TCU1215-0ExA Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Heating/Cooling Triac 1: not used Analog 0 - 10 VDC AD-TCU2215-0AxA 3-Speed Fan *AD-TCU2215-0ExA Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Heating/Cooling Triac 1: Heat/Cool On/Off Triac 1: not used AD-TCU1225-0AxB *AD-TCU1225-0ExB Triac 2: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off On/Off Fan Triac 1: Heat/Cool On/Off Triac 1: not used AD-TCU2225-0AxB *AD-TCU2225-0ExB Triac 2: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off 3-Speed Fan Triac 1: Heat/Cool DAO Triac 1: not used AD-TCU1225-0AxC *AD-TCU1225-0ExC Triac 2: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off On/Off Fan Triac 1: Heat/Cool DAO Triac 1: not used AD-TCU2225-0AxC *AD-TCU2225-0ExC Triac 2: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off 3-Speed Fan Triac 1: } Heat/Cool PAO Triac 1: not used AD-TCU1225-0AxD *AD-TCU1225-0ExD Triac 2: } Triac 2: Lighting On/Off On/Off Fan Triac 1: } Heat/Cool PAO Triac 1: not used AD-TCU2225-0AxD *AD-TCU2225-0ExD Triac 2: } Triac 2: Lighting On/Off 3-Speed Fan Notes: 1. * Models operate with binary hardware input (BI1) to set Heat/Cool mode, (AD-TCU1215-0EAA, for example). Other models use Source Temperature input. 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are powered from 24 VAC supply with a maximum total output capacity of 60VA.
24 VAC, 15% at 50/60 Hz (+ 60 VA max. for controlled devices) Independent 230 VAC supply for fan motor Two-pipe Fan Coil Unit
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 206
Output 3 (Relay)
Ordering Code AD-TCU1205-0BxA *AD-TCU1205-0CxA AD-TCU2205-0BxA AD-TCU1225-0BxB *AD-TCU1225-0CxB AD-TCU2225-0BxB AD-TCU1225-0BxC *AD-TCU1225-0CxC AD-TCU2225-0BxC AD-TCU1225-0BxD *AD-TCU1225-0CxD AD-TCU2225-0BxD AD-TCU1225-0BxE
Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2 Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2 Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2 Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2 Triac 1: } Heating On/Off Triac 2: } Cooling On/Off Triac 1: } Heating DAO Triac 2: } Cooling DAO
Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling Stage 1 Triac 2: } Cooling Stage 2 Triac 1: } Cooling Stage 1 Triac 2: } Cooling Stage 2 Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Variable-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Variable-Speed Fan
On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan
Four-pipe Fan Coil Unit (or separate heating and cooling sources)
3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan Lighting On/Off Lighting On/Off
AD-TCU2225-0BxE AD-TCU1215-0BxF *AD-TCU1215-0CxF AD-TCU2215-0BxF AD-TCU1215-0BxG *AD-TCU1215-0CxG AD-TCU2215-0BxG AD-TCU1215-0BxH *AD-TCU1215-0CxH AD-TCU2215-0BxH AD-TCU1215-0BxJ *AD-TCU1215-0CxJ AD-TCU2215-0BxJ AD-TCU1215-0DxB AD-TCU1215-0DxC
Notes: 1. * Models operate with Condensation Sensor (BI1) to close cooling valve, (AD-TCU1205-0CBA, for example). 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are powered from 24VAC supply with a maximum total output capacity of 60VA. 4. Analog outputs are direct acting for normally closed valves. Reverse acting outputs available on special request.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 207
Notes: 1. * Models operate with binary hardware input (BI1) to set Heat/Cool mode, (AD-TCU3245-0EAB, for example). Other models use Source Temperature input. 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are externally powered at 230VAC with a maximum output capacity of 1 ampere for each triac.
Output Configuration Application Power Supply Output 1 (2xTriac 230VAC) Output 2 (2xTriac 230VAC) Output 3 (Relay) Ordering Code
230 VAC, 10% at 50/60 Hz (690 VA max. for fan motor triacs separatly powered).
230 VAC, 10% at 50/60 Hz (690 VA max. for fan motor triacs separatly powered).
Four-pipe Fan Coil Unit (or separate heating and cooling sources)
Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2 Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2
Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling Stage 1 Triac 2: } Cooling Stage 2 Triac 1: } Cooling Stage 1 Triac 2: } Cooling Stage 2
On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan
AD-TCU3245-0BxB *AD-TCU32450CxB
AD-TCU4245-0BxB AD-TCU3245-0BxC *AD-TCU3245-0CxC AD-TCU4245-0BxC AD-TCU3245-0BxD *AD-TCU3245-0CxD AD-TCU4245-0BxD AD-TCU3245-0BxE AD-TCU4245-0BxE
Notes: 1. * Models operate with Condensation Sensor to close cooling valve, (AD-TCU3245-0CBC, for example). 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are externally powered at 230VAC with a maximum output capacity of 1 ampere for each triac.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 208
Output 2 (Analog or 2xTriac) Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating/Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating/Cooling Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: not used Triac 2: Lighting On/Off
Output 3 (Relay)
Ordering Code AD-TCU5215-0AxA *AD-TCU5215-0ExA AD-TCU6215-0AxA *AD-TCU6215-0ExA AD-TCU5225-0AxB *AD-TCU5225-0ExB AD-TCU6225-0AxB *AD-TCU6225-0ExB AD-TCU5225-0AxC *AD-TCU5225-0ExC AD-TCU6225-0AxC *AD-TCU6225-0ExC AD-TCU5225-0AxD *AD-TCU5225-0ExD AD-TCU6225-0AxD *AD-TCU6225-0ExD
On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan
Notes: 1. * Models operate with binary hardware input (BI1) to set Heat/Cool mode, (AD-TCU5215-0EAA, for example). Other models use Source Temperature input. 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are internally powered at 24VAC with a maximum total output capacity of 6VA.
Output Configuration Power Supply Output 1 (Analog or 2xTriac) Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating Analog 0 - 10 VDC Heating Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating On/Off Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: Heating DAO Triac 2: Lighting On/Off Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Heating Stage 1 Triac 2: } Heating Stage 2
230 VAC, 10% at 50/60 Hz (includes 6 VA max. for controlled devices at 24 VAC 15% and 690 VA max. for fan motor).
Application
Output 2 (Analog or 2xTriac) Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling On/Off Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: Cooling DAO Triac 2: not used Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling PAO Triac 2: } Triac 1: } Cooling Stage 1 Triac 2: } Cooling Stage 2
Output 3 (Relay)
Ordering Code AD-TCU5205-0BxA *AD-TCU5205-0CxA AD-TCU6205-0BxA AD-TCU5225-0BxB *AD-TCU5225-0CxB AD-TCU6225-0BxB AD-TCU5225-0BxC *AD-TCU5225-0CxC AD-TCU6225-0BxC AD-TCU5225-0BxD *AD-TCU5225-0CxD AD-TCU6225-0BxD AD-TCU5225-0BxE
On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan 3-Speed Fan On/Off Fan
Four-pipe Fan Coil Unit (or separate heating and cooling sources)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 209
3-Speed Fan
230 VAC, 10% at 50/60 Hz (includes 6 VA max. for controlled devices at 24 V 15%) + 690 VA max. for fan motor.
Four-pipe Fan Coil Unit (or separate heating and cooling sources)
Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling On/Off Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling 3-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling On/Off Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling 3-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling On/Off Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling 3-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling On/Off Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Cooling 3-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Lighting On/Off Variable-Speed Fan Analog 0 - 10 VDC Lighting On/Off Variable-Speed Fan
Notes: 1. * Models operate with Condensation Sensor (BI1) to close cooling valve, (AD-TCU5205-0CBA, for example). 2. Hardware setpoint range: x = A for 12 to 28C x = B for +/-3C 3. Outputs 1 and 2 are internally powered at 24VAC with a maximum total output capacity of 6VA. 4. Analog outputs are direct acting for normally closed valves. Reverse acting outputs available on special request.
Room Command Module (Direct Connect) Ordering Codes Description Type-Model Number
Occupancy Button NTC Sensor w/o S.P. dial TM-9150-0000 Occupancy Button NTC Sensor 12-28C TM-9160-0000 Occupancy Button NTC Sensor +/- 3 K TM-9160-0005 Occupancy Button NTC Sensor 12-28C 3-Speed Fan Override TM-9160-0002 Occupancy Button NTC Sensor +/- 3 K 3-Speed Fan Override TM-9160-0007 Occupancy Button w/o Sensor 12-28C TM-9170-0000 Occupancy Button w/o Sensor +/- 3 K TM-9170-0005 Occupancy Button w/o Sensor 12-28C 3-Speed Fan Override TM-9170-0002 Occupancy Button w/o Sensor +/- 3 K 3-Speed Fan Override TM-9170-0007 Note: All models above with off-white cover and grey base. Add -W to code for white cover and white base, e.g., TM-9150-0000-W. Add -K to code for set point dial with serrated edge (not for TM-9150), e.g. TM-9160-0005-K, TM-9160-0005-WK. The TCU Fan Coil Unit Controller does not support the TM-9180 Room Command Module.
Software and Accessories Ordering Codes Description Type-Model Number TE-9100-8501 COMM-PRO-0
Unit Mount NTC Temperature Sensor (1.5-m cable) TCU Commissioning Software for Windows 95/98 NT (SP6) (CD ROM).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 210
Point
Rating
1K Ni,Si, Pt, or 2.25 K NTC 1.6 Kohm pot.meter 0..10 VDC 1K Ni,Si, Pt, or 2.25 K NTC
1410
X X
Description
Ordering Code
Analog Inputs
Sideloop (humidity, dew point) Supply air temp. or supplemental heat temp.
Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure AP-VMA1410-0 sensor (cooling only) Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure AP-VMA1420-0 sensor (w/ Reheat and FanPowered) Integrated VAV Controller/Pressure sensor AP-VMA1430-0 (w/ Reheat and FanPowered)
0374 pa
X X
X X X X
X X X X
Binary Inputs
Dry contact
X X
Analog Outputs
Proportional heat
010 VDC at 10 mA
Lights, Fan, Box Heat-Valve BO-1, or 1-3 stage Electric, BO-2, Supplement Heat-Valve or BO-3, Single Stage Electric Box BO-4, Heat, External Damper BO-5 Actuator, Stepper Motor with Position Internal Actuator
Binary Outputs
2-phase Stepper
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 211
Accessories
Description The EP-2000 electro-pneumatic transducer with motor is used for converting an electrical contact signal into a 0.2 to 1.0 bar pneumatic standard signal. The instrument is suitable for connection of electrical incremental controllers with pneumtatic devices or for electrical remote adjustment Features High linearity Low histeresis High accuracy Low air supply influence Low air consumption High air capacity
EP-2000
Dimensions
Wiring/Tubing EP-2000 Motorised E / P-transducer Selection Table Description Supply Pressure B Output Pressure SA Running Time Type-Model Number EP-2000-7001 EP-2000-7004
0,21,0 bar
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 212
Accessories
Description EP-8000 Series Electro-Pneumatic Transducers convert a voltage or current signal from an electronic controller into a pneumatic output pressure signal. An increase or decrease in the input signal proportionally increases or decreases (respectively) the output pressure signal from the EP-8000. It is designed to output a proportional pneumatic control signal in response to an electronic control signal. All units feature barbed air connections for 5/32 or inch O.D. polytubing. Sequencing of pneumatic valve or damper actuators can be accomplished using a Johnson Controls V-9502 (Valve) or D-9502 (Damper) Actuator Positioner. Four models are available, which are grouped into two basic versions: low volume output units (nonrelay) and high volume output units (relay) Supply Pressure 126 to 175 kPa (18 to 25 psig), nominal 140 kPa (20 psig) Hysteresis 1.4 kPa typical, Enclosure IP42 Features Compact, simple design Choice of 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA input range Hypodermic needle test point Factory set, fully adjustable zero and span High accuracy with low hysteresis
Input S ignal
S 20
EP-8000
Input Signal
FO-1
S 20
EP-8000 Series Electro-Pneumatic Transducers Selection Table Output Input Range Factory Output Range kPa (psig) Maximum Input Input Impedance Type-Model Number EP-8000-1 EP-8000-2 EP-8000-3 EP-8000-4 Type-Model number A-4000-8001 EP-8000-101 R-3710-8307 R-3710-8207
Low Volume (Non-relay) High Volume (Relay) Low Volume (Non-relay) High Volume (Relay)
30 mA DC 30 mA DC 30 mA DC 30 mA DC
Inline Air Filter (required for all models) Mounting bracket Restriction/T-fitting for models without relay Restriction right-angle for models without relay
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 213
Accessories
Com +0...+10VDC Input + 15 VDC Const. (Output) Analog input A B C
4 5
1 2
7 8
12
70
43 53
SR-9100
Dimensions
Wiring
Description The SR-9100 is a two-stage staging relay with 0...10 VDC input signal and 2 potential free contact outputs. The SR-9100 can be used in conjunction with a Johnson Controls transducer or a Johnson Controls controller, to convert the 0...10 VDC output signal into two ON/OFF SPDT stages. The two outputs can be connected to two ON/OFF control devices, such as compressors, electrical heating coils, etc. At each stage there is the possibility to adjust the switching point (SP) and the differential. Features DIN-omega rail mounting 24 VAC or 230 VAC supply models available High rating 250 VAC, 10 (5) A SPDT contact outputs LED indicating status of outputs Fixed time delay between stages Same styling as SC-9100 easy DDC controller Adjustable SetPoint, Differential and mode. Several modules can be connected in parallel on one 0...10 V signal
SR-9100 Staging Relay Selection Table Set point Range 595% (0.59.5 VDC) Diff. Range 560% (0.56.0 VDC) Supply Voltage 24 VAC 230 VAC Tolerance -15%/+10% Contacts 250 VAC, 10 (5) A, SPDT Time Delay Stage 1: 1 second Stage 2: 2 seconds Type-Model Number
SR-9100-1 SR-9100-2
118
45 83
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 214
GS-3001
H L
Rp 3/4
100
GS-3001 Solenoid Gas Valve Selection Table Connection Pmax (mbar) Options Power Supply * Type-Model Number GS-3001-3120 GS-3001-3140 GS-3001-3121 GS-3001-3141
Rp 3/4
20
10
p 5 [mbar]4
3 2
Air
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 100 200
4 5 6
8 10
20
30 40 50
100
200
4 5 6
8 10
20
30 40 50
100
200
V [m /h]
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page 215
PV-1000 Connection H Rp 1/8 - 1/2 L PV-1000 Solenoid Gas Valve Selection Table Connection Rp 1/8 Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/2 Pmax (mbar) 350 350 350 350 Vn (mN3/h) Natural Gas p = 2,5mbar 1.5 1.7 3.1 3.1 Power Supply 24V AC 50/60 Hz 230 V AC 50/60 Hz 24V AC 50/60 Hz 230 V AC 50/60 Hz 24V AC 50/60 Hz 230 V AC 50/60 Hz 24V AC 50/60 Hz 230 V AC 50/60 Hz Type-Model Number PV-1000-3101 PV-1000-3301 PV-1000-3102 PV-1000-3302 PV-1000-3103 PV-1000-3303 PV-1000-3104 PV-1000-3304 66 75 L (mm) H (mm)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
216
Technical Specifications Class: A Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l Mounting position: horizontal-vertical Operating Voltages: 230V, 120V, 24V 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 23VA Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: cable grommet PG 13,5 Duty Cycles: max. 10min-1 Approvals: EC (EN 161), CSA (ANSI Z21.21, ANSI Z21.78), European Pressure Directive 97/23/EC, UL on request, CE-0063AN3731 Model GS-2 GS-4 L (mm) valve body + flanges
60 +32 (Rp 3/8, 1/2), +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1) 80 +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1), +46 (Rp 1-1/4, 1-1/2)
GS-20/25 and GS-40/45 Solenoid Gas Valves Selection Table Description Pmax (mbar) Single/ Double Seating Power Supply Type-Model Number
Valve without filterplate or connection flange. See page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow Curves see page 221. On/Off, fast opening with flow adjuster On/Off, step slow opening with flow adjuster (hydraulic damper) On/Off, fast opening with flow adjuster On/Off, step slow opening with flow adjuster (hydraulic damper) On/Off, fast opening with flow adjuster On/Off, step slow opening with flow adjuster (hydraulic damper) On/Off, fast opening with flow adjuster On/Off, step slow opening with flow adjuster (hydraulic damper) 200 200 360 360 100 100 360 360 Single Single Double Double Single Single Double Double 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz
GS-2510-2000 GS-2512-2000 GS-2520-2000 GS-2522-2000 GS-2010-2000 GS-2012-2000 GS-2020-2000 GS-2022-2000 GS-4510-2000 * GS-4512-2000 * GS-4520-2000 * GS-4522-2000 * GS-4010-2000 * GS-4012-2000 * GS-4020-2000 * GS-4022-2000 *
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
217
Gas Controls
Description The model is an on/off valve with a manual flow adjuster for the 1 st stage. The electronically integrated damper acts to slow opening of the 1st to the 2nd stage of the valve. There is no flow adjuster for the 2nd stage. The 2-Stage Model is recommended to be used for appliances with high flow, where the flow in the 1 st stage is higher than 40% of the maximum flow. The use of a bypass valve with an on/off valve is recommended if the flow in the 1 st stage is less than 40%. Features Compact body design. Two body sized GS-2 and GS-4 Sizes GS-2: Rp 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Sizes GS-4: Rp 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2 Side pressure taps G 1/8 (G 1/4 for GS-4 available) Technical Specifications Class: A Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l Mounting position: upright, vertical Operating Voltages: 230V, 120V 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 17VA Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: cable grommet PG 13,5 Duty Cycles: max. 1min-1 Approvals: EC (EN 161), CSA (ANSI Z21.21, ANSI Z21.78), European Pressure Directive 97/23/EC, CE-0063AN3731 Model GS-2 L (mm) valve body + flanges
60 +32 (Rp 3/8, 1/2), +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1)
H (mm)
133 143
GS-4 80 +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1), +46 (Rp 1-1/4, 1-1/2) L GS-21 and GS-41 Solenoid Gas Valves Selection Table Description Pmax (mbar)
360 360
Power Supply
Type-Model Number
Valve without filterplate or connection flange, see page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow curves see page 221. On/Off, two stage valve On/Off, two stage valve 230V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
GS-2120-2000 GS-4120-2000 *
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
218
GS-20 and GS-40 Multi option, Single stage Solenoid Gas Valves
Gas Controls
Description Pressure Regulator: on/off valve with a diaphragm balancing with the force of the regulator spring. Only GS-4 models: The Servo Precision model is an on/off valve with an adjustable servo precision regulator. The servo precision regulator operates as a dual-stage regulator for start gas and control pressure. When the valve is energised, the pressure regulator first moves to the start gas stage (PST), remains there for several seconds, and then slowly moves to the pre-adjusted setpoint pressure (PG). Only GS-4 models: The Gas/Air Ratio control provides modulating combustion for appliance efficiency. When the valve is energised, it begins to open. The opening degree is determined by the pre-adjusted ratio and combustion air pressure (PA), which is connected to the controller by an external impulse line as the primary setpoint parameter. The controller modulates the valve opening degree without overshooting the preset outlet pressure. For additional precision control, the combustion chamber pressure (PF) can be connected to the controller as an additional reference to compensate for the effect of combustion pressure variations. Features Compact body design. Two body sized GS-2 and GS-4 Sizes GS-2: Rp 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Sizes GS-4: Rp 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2 Side pressure taps G 1/8 (G 1/4 for GS-4 available) Technical Specifications Class: A Regulating Settings: Spring Regulator: 6 to 20 mbar Servo Regulator: Start Gas Stage PST 2.5 to 10 mbar, Outlet Pressure PG 5 to 50 mbar Gas/Air Ratio: Outlet Pressure PG 0.5 to 50 mbar, Air Inlet Pressure PA 0.5 to 30 mbar Combustion Chamb. Pressure PF -2 to 20 mbar, Zero Set Z -2 to 2 mbar Maximum Regulating Differential Pressure Spring Regulator: 20 mbar Servo Regulator & Gas/Air Ratio: 50 mbar Regulator Classifications: Spring Regulator Class B/EN88 Servo Regulator & Gas/Air Ratio Class A/EN88 Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l Mounting position: horizontal-vertical Operating Voltages: 230V, 120V, 24V 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 23VA Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: cable grommet PG 13,5 Duty Cycles: max. 1min-1 Approvals: EC (EN88, EN 161), CSA (ANSI Z21.21, ANSI Z21.78), European Pressure Directive 97/23/EC, UL on request CE-0063AN3731 Model GS-2 GS-4 L (mm) valve body + flanges
60 +32 (Rp 3/8, 1/2), +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1) 80 +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1), +46 (Rp 1-1/4, 1-1/2)
H (mm)
133 143
Description
Pmax (mbar)
Power Supply
Type-Model Number
Valve without filterplate or connection flange. See page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow curves see next page.
On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with Servo Precision Regulator, step slow opening On / Off valve with Gas/Air Ratio Controller
100 100
Double Double
230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
100
Double
100
Double
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
219
GS-20/21 Rp 1/2
GS-25 Rp 1/2 200 GS-25 Rp 3/4 100 70 50 40 30 20 Pressure Drop mbar GS-25 Rp 1
120.0 80.0 60.0 40.0 28.0 20.0 16.0 12.0 8.0 6.0 in. W.C.
10 7 5 4 3 2
1.5
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000 m /h
50
100
200
300
500
1000
10000
20000 30000
cf/h
10
20
40
60
100
200
400 600
m /h
40
50
100
200
300
500
1000 Capacity
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000
cf/h
GS-40/41 Rp 3/4 GS-40/41 Rp 1 300 200 GS-45 Rp 3/4 GS-45 Rp 1 100 70 50 40 30 20 Pressure Drop mbar GS-45 Rp 1 1/2 GS-45 Rp 1 1/4
GS-40/41 Rp 1 1/4
120.0 80.0 60.0 40.0 28.0 20.0 16.0 12.0 8.0 6.0 in. W.C.
10 7 5 4 3 2
1.5
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000 m /h
50
100
200
300
500
1000
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000 30000
cf/h
10
20
40
60
100
200
400 600
m /h
40
50
100
200
300
500
1000 Capacity
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000
cf/h
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
220
L (mm)
150 200 180 230
Pmax (mbar)
200 200 150 150
Options
Standard * Standard * Standard ** Standard **
Power Supply
230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
20
10
p 5 [mbar] 4
3 2
4 5 6
8 10
20
30 40 50
100
200
3 [m /h]
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
221
GM-20/25 and GM-40/45 Single stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves
GM-20/25 and GM-40/45 Solenoid Gas Valves Selection Table Description Valve 1 Pmax (mbar) Power Supply Type-Model Number
Valve without connection flange. See page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow Curves see page 227.
On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve, double seat
On / Off valve single seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve double seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, double seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve single seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve double seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, double seat, flow adjuster
230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
GM-2510-2000 GM-2512-2000 GM-2520-2000 GM-2522-2000 GM-2010-2000 GM-2012-2000 GM-2020-2000 GM-2022-2000 GM-4510-2000 * GM-4512-2000 * GM-4520-2000 * GM-4522-2000 * GM-4010-2000 * GM-4012-2000 * GM-4020-2000 * GM-4022-2000 *
360
24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
360
24V 50/60 Hz
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
222
GM-21/26 and GM-41/46 Two stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves
H (mm)
133 143
Description Valve 1
Description Valve 2
Pmax (mbar)
200 360 100 360
Power Supply
Type-Model Number
Valve without connection flange. See page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow Curves see page 227.
On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, double seat
On / Off valve two stage with flow On / Off valve two stage with flow On / Off valve two stage with flow On / Off valve two stage with flow
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
223
GM-20/25/21 and GM-40/45/41 Single stage and Two stage Duo block Solenoid Gas Valves
Gas Controls
Description Two-Stage models: on/off valve with a manual flow adjuster for the 1 st stage. The electronically st nd integrated damper acts to slow opening of the 1 to the 2 stage of the valve. There is no flow adjuster for the 2nd stage. The 2-Stage Model is recommended to be used for appliances with high flow, where st the flow in the 1 stage is higher than 40% of the maximum flow. The use of a bypass valve with an on/off valve is recommended if the flow in the 1 st stage is less than 40%. Pressure Regulator: on/off valve with a diaphragm balancing with the force of the regulator spring. Only GM-4 models: The Servo Precision model is an on/off valve with an adjustable servo precision regulator. The servo precision regulator operates as a dual-stage regulator for start gas and control pressure. When the valve is energised, the pressure regulator first moves to the start gas stage (PST), remains there for several seconds, and then slowly moves to the pre-adjusted setpoint pressure (PG). Only GM-4 models: The Gas/Air Ratio control provides modulating combustion for appliance efficiency. When the valve is energised, it begins to open. The opening degree is determined by the pre-adjusted ratio and combustion air pressure (PA), which is connected to the controller by an external impulse line as the primary setpoint parameter. The controller modulates the valve opening degree without overshooting the preset outlet pressure. For additional precision control, the combustion chamber pressure (PF) can be connected to the controller as an additional reference to compensate for the effect of combustion pressure variations. Features Compact body design. Two body sized GM-2 and GM-4 Sizes GM-2: Rp 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Sizes GM-4: Rp 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2 Side pressure taps G 1/8 (G 1/4 for GM-4 available) Technical Specifications Class: A Regulating SettinGM: Spring Regulator: 6 to 20 mbar Servo Regulator: Start Gas Stage PST 2.5 to 10 mbar, Outlet Pressure PG 5 to 50 mbar Gas/Air Ratio: Outlet Pressure PG 0.5 to 50 mbar, Air Inlet Pressure PA 0.5 to 30 mbar Combustion Chamb. Pressure PF -2 to 20 mbar, Zero Set Z -2 to 2 mbar Maximum Regulating Differential Pressure Spring Regulator: 20 mbar Servo Regulator & Gas/Air Ratio: 50 mbar Regulator Classifications: Spring Regulator Class B/EN88 Servo Regulator & Gas/Air Ratio Class A/EN88 Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l Mounting position: horizontal-vertical Operating Voltages: 230V, 120V, 24V 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 23VA Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: cable grommet PG 13,5 Duty Cycles: max. 1min-1 Approvals: EC (EN88, EN 161, EN 126), CSA (ANSI Z21.21, ANSI Z21.78), European Pressure Directive 97/23/EC, UL on request (not for Two-Stage Valves) CE-0063AN3731 L (mm) Model H (mm) valve body + flanges GM-2
L Continued on next page. 132 +32 (Rp 3/8, 1/2), +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1) 173 +38 (Rp 3/4), +44 (Rp 1), +46 (Rp 1-1/4, 1-1/2) 133 143
GM-4
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
224
GM-20/25/21 and GM-40/45/41 Solenoid Gas Valves Selection Table Description Valve 1 Description Valve 2 Pmax (mbar) Power Supply Type-Model Number
Valve without connection flange. See page 231 for applicable connection flange. Flow Curves see next page
On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve with pressure regulator On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, single seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve, double seat On / Off valve with pressure regulator
On / Off valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve, double seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, double seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve two stage with flow adjuster first stage On / Off valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, single seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve, double seat, flow adjuster On / Off, step slow opening valve, double seat, flow adjuster On / Off valve Servo Precision Regulator On / Off, valve Gas/Air Ratio On / Off valve Servo Precision Regulator On / Off, valve Gas/Air Ratio On / Off valve two stage with flow adjuster first stage
230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
GM-2530-2000 GM-2532-2000 GM-2540-2000 GM-2542-2000 GM-2030-2000 GM-2032-2000 GM-2040-2000 GM-2042-2000 GM-2140-2000 GM-4530-2000 * GM-4532-2000 * GM-4540-2000 * GM-4542-2000 * GM-4030-2000 * GM-4032-2000 * GM-4040-2000 * GM-4042-2000 * GM-4550-2000 * GM-4552-2000 * GM-4560-2000 * GM-4562-2000 * GM-4050-2000 * GM-4052-2000 * GM-4060-2000 * GM-4062-2000 * GM-4140-2000 *
100
24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
100
24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz
* with side pressure taps G 1/4 the last digits will be 3000 (e.g. GS-4010-3000).
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
225
GM-20/21 Rp 3/8 Pressure Drop mbar 300 200 GM-25/26 Rp 1/2 100 70 50 40 30 20 GM-25/26 Rp 3/4 GM-25/26 Rp 1 GM-25/26 Rp 3/8
GM-20/21 Rp 1/2
GM-20/21 Rp 3/4 GM-20/21 Rp 1 Pressure Drop in. W.C. 120.0 80.0 60.0 40.0 28.0 20.0 16.0 12.0 8.0 6.0
10 7 5 4 3 2
m /h
1.5 2
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000 m /h
50
100
200
300
500
1000
10000
20000 30000
cf/h
LP (sp gr =
10
20
40
60
100
200
400 600
m /h
40
50
100
200
300
500
1000
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000
cf/h
Capacity
GM-40/41 Rp 1 Pressure Drop mbar 300 200 GM-45/46 Rp 3/4 GM-40/41 Rp 3/4
GM-40/41 Rp 1 1/4
100 70 50 40 30 20
10 7 5 4 3 2
m /h
1.5
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000 m /h
50
100
200
300
500
1000
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000 30000
cf/h
LP (sp gr =
10
20
40
60
100
200
400 600
m /h
40 50
100
200
300
500
1000
2000 3000
5000
10000
20000
cf/h
Capacity
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
226
GH-5000 (screwed)
L (mm)
119 119 119 153 135 135 200 230 290 310 350 400 480
H (mm)
296 296 296 323 359 359 296 323 359 349 377 388 412
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
227
GH-5000 screwed models Selection Table Connection Vn (mN3/h) Natural Gas p = 2,5mbar Actuator Configuration Pmax (mbar) Opening time (s) Stroke (mm) Type Model Number * GH-5110-2110 GH-5110-2311 GH-5119-2411 GH-5110-2511 GH-5119-2610 GH-5110-3110 GH-5110-3311 GH-5119-3411 GH-5110-3511 GH-5119-3610 GH-5110-5110 GH-5110-5311 GH-5119-5411 GH-5110-5511 GH-5119-5610 GH-5210-6110 GH-5210-6311 GH-5219-6411 GH-5210-6511 GH-5219-6610 GH-5610-7111 GH-5610-7311 GH-5619-7411 GH-5610-7511 GH-5619-7611 GH-5610-8111 GH-5610-8311 GH-5619-8411 GH-5610-8511 GH-5619-8611
On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 3/4 18 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 1 29 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 1-1/2 42 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 2 91 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 2-1/2 130 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off Rp 3 170 On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI 120VAC versions available on request
1.000
< 6,5
14
1.000
< 6,5
14
1.000
< 6,5
14
1.000
<8
22
1.000
<8
22
800
<8
22
Rp 1 Rp
300 200
Rp 1
Rp 2
Rp 2 Rp 3
120.0 80.0 60.0
100 70 50 40 30 20
Pressure Drop mbar
10 7 5 4 3 2
0.4 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300400 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 10000 m /h
3
15 20
30 40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
0.5
10
20
30
50
100
200
300
T
LP - Propane (sp gr = 1.53) 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 4000 6000 m /h cf/h x1000
3
0.4 0.5
10
Capacity
20
30
50
100
200
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
228
GH-5000 flanged models Selection Table Vn (mN3/h) Natural Actuator Connection Gas p = Configuration 2,5mbar
On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI On-Off On-Low-Off On-Low-Off + CPI Ignition On-Low-Off On-Off + CPI
Pmax (mbar)
Stroke (mm)
Type Model Number (Excluding Voltage)* GH-5120-1110 GH-5120-1311 GH-5129-1411 GH-5120-1511 GH-5129-1610 GH-5220-2110 GH-5220-2311 GH-5229-2411 GH-5220-2511 GH-5229-2610 GH-5620-3111 GH-5620-3311 GH-5629-3411 GH-5620-3511 GH-5629-3611 GH-5620-4111 GH-5620-4311 GH-5629-4411 GH-5620-4511 GH-5629-4611 GH-5720-5110 GH-5720-5311 GH-5729-5411 GH-5720-5511 GH-5729-5610 GH-5720-6110 GH-5720-6311 GH-5729-6411 GH-5720-6511 GH-5729-6610 GH-5720-7110 GH-5720-7311 GH-5729-7411 GH-5720-7511 GH-5729-7610
DN 40
43
1000
< 6,5
14
DN 50
88
1000
<8
22
DN 65
127
1000
<8
22
DN 80
168
800
<8
22
DN 100
320
800
< 13
36
DN 125
420
650
< 13
36
DN 150
610
350
< 13
36
10 7 5 4 3 2
0.4 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 10000 m3 /h
15
20
30
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
4000 600 0
0.5
10
20
30
50
100
200
300
10
20
30 40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
4000 6000
m3 /h cf/h x1000
0.4 0.5
10 Capacity
20
30
50
100
200
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
229
Gas Controls
Pressure Switches for Gas Controls see page 233
Description
Flange-Set Rp 3/8 for GS-2.../GM-2... Flange-Set Rp 1/2 for GS-2.../GM-2... Flange-Set Rp 3/4 for GS-2.../GM-2... Flange-Set Rp 1 for GS-2.../GM-2... Flange-Set Rp 3/4 for GS-4.../GM-4... Flange-Set Rp 1 for GS-4.../GM-4... Flange-Set Rp 1-1/4 for GS-4.../GM-4... Flange-Set Rp 1-1/2 for GS-4.../GM-4... Flange-Sets are available in NPT execution. Bypass-Solenoid Valve, 200 mbar (internal bypass) Ignition Gas Valve, 200 mbar (external bypass) Filter plate with DIN-Filter insert for GS-2.../GM-2... (Standard with GM-2...) Filter plate with DIN-Filter insert for GS-4.../GM-4... (Standard with GM-4...) Filter GS-25/27.. (Sieve 50 m and fleece) Filter GS-45/47.. (Sieve 50 m and fleece) Filter GM/GS-2... (Sieve 50 m and fleece) Filter GM/GS-4... (Sieve 50 m and fleece) Wiring connector 4 pole for direct mount on control cover, ISO 4 400 (DIN 43650) Wiring connector 4 pole for pressure switch, GO-1101-0000, ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) Wiring connector 4 pole for Closed Position Indicator. NPT Cable inlet (PG 13,5 on /2 NPT)
1
Power Supply
Type-Model number GO-0021-0000 * GO-0022-0000 * GO-0023-0000 * GO-0024-0000 * GO-0043-0000 * GO-0044-0000 * GO-0046-0000 * GO-0045-0000 *
GO-2530-0000 GO-2630-0000 GO-0120-0000 * GO-0140-0000 * GO-9003-0000 * GO-9004-0000 * GO-9001-0000 * GO-9002-0000 * GO-9101-0000 GO-9102-0000 GO-9103-0000 GO-9401-0000 GO-4200-0000 * GO-4400-0000 * GO-9402-0000
Signalswitch CPI-Set for GS-2.../GM-2... ** Signalswitch CPI-Set for GS-4.../GM-4... ** Control cover for directmount wiring connector for GS/GM ISO 4400 (DIN 43 650) *
these options are available mounted to the valve. In that case the last digit of the international order code will be set to 1. (e.g. GO-1000-0001)
** CPI can only be used at on/off valves with double seat (not for regulators, two-stage and electronic modulating valve models)
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
230
Gas Controls
Description Replacement actuators (coils and wiring boxes)
GS-20 / 25 / 40 / 45
Power Supply
230 V 120 V 24 V 230 V 120 V 24 V 230 V 120 V 24 V 230 V 120 V 24 V 230 V 120 V 230 V 120 V 230 V 120 V 230 V 120 V 230 V 120 V 24 V
Type-Model number GO-9510-0000 GO-9511-0000 GO-9512-0000 GO-9510-1000 GO-9511-1000 GO-9512-1000 GO-9520-0000 GO-9521-0000 GO-9522-0000 GO-9520-1000 GO-9521-1000 GO-9522-1000 GO-9540-0000 GO-9541-0000 GO-9540-1000 GO-9541-1000 GO-9550-0000 GO-9551-0000 GO-9550-1000 GO-9551-1000 GO-9530-0000 GO-9531- 0000 GO-9532-0000
GM-20 / 25 / 40 / 45
GS-21 / 41 GS-21 / 41 with directmount wiring connector GM-21 / 26 / 41 / 46 GM-21 / 26 / 41 / 46 with directmount wiring connector
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
231
Description This switch senses a change in the gas inlet or outlet pressure. Features Easy to read set point scale. Wide range (5 to 500 mbar) Versatile mounting options Technical Specifications Electrical Data: 6 (1.5) A / 250 VAC Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l, air Mounting position: horizontal-vertical Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: cable grommet PG 9, male connector AMP 6.3x0.8 EN60730-1 Trip Setting Tolerance: 10% Tolerance of differential: 5% Approvals: EC (DVGW, DIN 3398-1, VDE 0630) CE-0085AR0012
60.5
83.5
40.5
60.5
Type-Model Number GO-1000-0000 GO-1001-0000 GO-1010-0000 GO-1011-0000 GO-1013-0000 GO-1014-0000 GO-1020-0000 GO-1021-0000 GO-1023-0000 GO-1024-0000
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
232
Description This switch senses a change in the gas inlet or outlet pressure. Features Easy to read set point scale. Wide range (6 to 50 mbar)
93
74
Technical Specifications Electrical Data: 5 (2) A / 250 VAC Media: suitable for all types of gas according to DVWG sheet G 260/l, air Mounting position: horizontal-vertical Enclosure: IP54 (DIN 40 050) Wiring: 4-pin connector plug ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) Tolerance of differential: 1.4 mbar Approvals: EC (prEN 1854), CE-0063AR1501
Models GO-11.. for GM/GS-2/4 Valve Models GO-11.. Sensitive Gas Pressure Controls Selection Table Max. Range pressure Connection (mbar) (mbar)
6 - 50 360 Filter plate GM/GS-2/4 models. Please order filter plate separately for GS-2/4 models.
For further information and additional models see Product Data Sheet OrderCode: CAT-CounterLine-2004
Page
233